Chrysler 2007 Crossfire Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Chrysler Chrysler-2007-Chrysler-Crossfire-Owners-Manual-814448 chrysler-2007-chrysler-crossfire-owners-manual-814448 chrysler pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 299

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

PAGE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1

INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 9

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 10

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your Crossfire. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:

INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located beneath the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label as a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

▫ Start Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

m Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ Obtaining Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

▫ Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

m Glove Compartment Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ To Use The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

▫ Central Locking Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Automatic Central Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

m Security Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ General Notes On The Central Locking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Tow-Away Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Emergency Unlocking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

m Decklid Internal Emergency
Release - Roadster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

m Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

▫ Power Window Operation With The
Convertible Top Switch (Roadster Only) . . . . . .22

m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .55

m Rear Liftgate/Decklid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys only from an authorized
dealer. Ask your dealer for these numbers and keep them
in a safe place.

To release the key from the folded position, press the
button. The key unfolds from the fob.
The transmitter for the remote control is located in the
key fob.

CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: To avoid discharging the battery, the key must
be removed from the ignition when the vehicle is parked.
Keys
Included with your vehicle are two remote controls with
folding keys. The remote control operates all locks on the
vehicle, including the locking fuel filler door.

Obtaining Replacement Keys
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be obtained from your authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Important!
Removing the key from the steering lock activates the
start lock-out. The engine cannot be started.
Turning the key in the steering lock to the ON/RUN
position deactivates the start lock-out.
NOTE: In case the engine cannot be started, and START
and ERROR are shown in the odometer display field, the
system is not operational. Contact an authorized dealer.
Ignition Key Removal
Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key.
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmissions, if
you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever
in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the
key cylinder. If this occurs, turn the key clockwise
slightly, then remove the key as described.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LOCK

The glove compartment can be locked by turning the key
straight up to the vertical or right position, and then
removing the key.
To unlock the glove compartment, turn the key to the
horizontal or left position, and then remove the key.

DOOR LOCKS
The vehicle doors can be locked when the doors are
closed by either manually pressing the button down at
the top of the door panel, pressing and releasing the
bottom portion of the central locking switch located in
the console, or by pressing and releasing the Lock
transmit button on the key fob. Also, by turning the key
clockwise in the driver’s door, both doors, liftgate/
decklid, fuel filler door, and center console (roadster
only) will lock.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The doors can be unlocked by pulling on the inside door
handle, pressing and releasing the top portion of the
central locking switch located in the console, or by
pressing and releasing the Unlock transmit button on the
key fob. Both doors can also be unlocked by turning the
key counterclockwise in the driver’s door.
NOTE: If the key in the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position, the vehicle cannot be locked or
unlocked with the remote control.
When you lock the vehicle, both door lock buttons
should move down. If either one stays up, the respective
door is not properly closed. You should then unlock the
vehicle, open and reclose the door, and lock the vehicle
again.
Each individual door can be locked with the respective
door lock button - the driver’s door can only be locked
when it is closed. If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside, only the door being opened
from the inside will unlock, and the alarm will come on.
The other door, the rear liftgate/decklid, fuel filler door,
and center console (roadster only) will remain locked.

NOTE: In case of a malfunction in the central locking
system, the doors can be locked and unlocked individually. To lock, turn the key in the driver’s door lock
clockwise, or push down the lock buttons. To unlock,
turn the key in the driver’s door lock counterclockwise,
or pull the inside door handles.

WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive and
when you park and leave the vehicle.
Central Locking Switch
The central locking switch is located in the console. The
doors and rear liftgate/decklid can only be locked with
the central locking switch if both doors are closed.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote
control or key, the doors and rear liftgate/decklid cannot
be unlocked with the central locking switch. If the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

was previously locked with the central locking switch,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside.
NOTE: The fuel filler door and center console (roadster
only) cannot be locked or unlocked with the central
locking switch.
Automatic Central Locking
The central locking switch also operates the automatic
central locking feature. With the automatic central locking feature activated, the doors and rear liftgate/decklid
are locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15
km/h) or more; however, the fuel filler door remains
unlocked.
To activate this feature, turn the key to the ON/RUN
position and hold the upper portion of the switch for a
minimum of five seconds. To deactivate, turn the key to
the ON/RUN position and hold the lower portion of the
switch for a minimum of five seconds.

NOTE: If the doors are unlocked with the central
locking switch after activating the automatic central
locking feature and neither door is opened, the doors
remain unlocked even at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
NOTE: If you attempt to lock the doors with the key in
the ignition and the driver’s door open, the doors will not
lock.
General Notes On the Central Locking System
If the key in the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with
the remote control.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked at any time
with the remote control, it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the remote.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: To help prevent the vehicle battery from discharging during short periods of inactivity, perform the
following:
1. Make sure that the rear liftgate/decklid, hood and
doors are completely closed.
2. Make sure that remote transmitter is operating and
that the battery is good.
3. Make sure that the hood, rear liftgate/decklid and
door switches are in adjustment.
Perform the quick system check which follows: Use
the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the parking
lamps flash three times, the system is operating properly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the
system. See your authorized dealer for service.
Emergency Unlocking Feature
In the case of an accident, the doors unlock automatically
a short time after a strong deceleration is detected, such
as in a collision (this is intended to aid rescue and exit).
However, the key must still be in the ignition.

Start Lockout
Removing the key from the ignition switch activates the
start lockout. The engine cannot be started. Turning the
key to the ON/RUN position deactivates the start lockout. If the engine cannot be started, and the messages
START and ERROR are shown in the odometer display
field, the system is not operational. Contact an authorized dealer.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This feature allows you to lock or unlock the vehicle from
remote locations using a hand-held transmitter located in
the key fob. You don’t have to point the transmitter at the
vehicle to activate the system. The vehicle doors, rear
liftgate/decklid, fuel filler door, and center console (roadster only) can be locked and unlocked using the remote
control.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE: If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the key
fob, neither door is opened, the key is not inserted in the
ignition switch, or the central locking switch is not
activated, the vehicle will automatically lock.
Press the Unlock transmit button on the key fob once to
unlock driver’s door, rear liftgate/decklid, fuel filler
door, and center console (roadster only). Press the Unlock
transmit button twice to unlock both doors, rear liftgate/
decklid, fuel filler door, and center console (roadster
only).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Lock The Doors
Press the Lock button on the key fob once. All turn signal
lights blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is
locked. If the turn signal lights do not blink, a door or
rear liftgate/decklid is not closed properly.
The entire vehicle, including the fuel filler door, may be
locked or unlocked by using the key in the driver’s door.
The doors and liftgate/decklid can be locked or unlocked
by pressing the central locking switch located in the
center console.
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change
the batteries in the remote control.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Panic Alarm
The panic alarm unlocks the driver’s door, turns on the
interior lights, flashes the foglights and sounds the horn
for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
The vehicle can be driven while in the Panic mode.
To Use the Panic Alarm
Press and hold the Panic button to activate the alarm.
Press and hold the Panic button or unlock the door with
the key to deactivate the alarm. The alarm will also shut
off after three minutes or when vehicle speed reaches 15
mph (24 km/h).

General Information
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement Lithium battery is Panasonict CR 2025 or equivalent.
To change the batteries:

• Insert the new batteries in the direction of the arrow
with the positive symbol facing upwards.
• Replace the battery cover and press on it until you feel
it engage.
• Press release button (2) on the key fob. The key folds
out.
• Press the battery cover (1) in the direction of the arrow.
• Remove the old batteries.

NOTE: Only replace the batteries in pairs.
The system may have to be resynchronized if the transmitter is without voltage for several minutes. To synchronize, aim the transmitter eye at the vehicle and briefly
press either the Lock or the Unlock button twice. Within

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

approximately 30 seconds, insert the key in the ignition
and turn it to the ON/RUN position. The remote control
should once again be operational.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The system monitors the doors, rear liftgate/decklid,
hood, and ignition for unauthorized operation. The security alarm system is automatically armed or disarmed
with the remote control or any of your vehicle’s keys by
locking or unlocking the vehicle.
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately 10
seconds after locking the vehicle. A blinking light in the
tow away alarm switch indicates that the alarm is armed.
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lights will flash and an alarm will sound when a
door, the rear liftgate/decklid, the hood, or glove compartment is opened, or if someone attempts to raise the
vehicle for towing. The alarm will flash the exterior
lamps for approximately three minutes and sound an
audible alarm for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even
if the activating element is immediately closed.

Tow-Away Alarm
The tow-away alarm switch is located on the console. To
deactivate for towing or jacking up the vehicle, press and
release the upper portion of the switch. Press and release
the upper portion to activate it again.
After the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lights will flash and an alarm will sound when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle. The alarm will
flash the exterior lamps for approximately three minutes
and sound an audible alarm for 30 seconds. The alarm
will stay on even if the vehicle is immediately lowered.
To cancel the alarm, insert the key into the ignition switch
or press a transmit button on the key fob.
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature when
parking on a surface subject to movement (such as a
ferry), switch off the tow-away alarm. To do so, turn the
key in the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK or ACC
position, or remove the key from the ignition switch.
Press the tow-away alarm switch and the indicator light
will illuminate briefly. Exit the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle with the key or the remote control.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the
vehicle is locked again with the key or the remote control,
at which time it is automatically reactivated.

DECKLID INTERNAL EMERGENCY RELEASE ROADSTER
As a security measure, a Decklid Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the decklid latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside
the trunk, the decklid can be easily opened by pulling on
the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the decklid
latching mechanism. See picture.

WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk by
climbing into the trunk from outside. Always close
the decklid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape.
If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
If the battery voltage drops below the minimum
threshold at any time, the Trunk Internal Emergency
Release will not function.

WARNING!
The Trunk Internal Emergency Release will not function during the convertible top operation.
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located in the console.
To operate, turn the key in the ignition switch to the ACC
or ON/RUN position. Press the switch in to the resistance point to open; release the switch when the window
is in the desired position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

For express opening of windows, press the switch past
the resistance point and release; the window lowers to
the fully open position. To interrupt the procedure,
briefly press the switch again and release.
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition switch, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal injury.
Power Window Operation With The Convertible
Top Switch (Roadster Only)
The power windows can also be operated by using the
convertible top switch.
To operate, turn the key in the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position. Press down on the rear of the convertible top switch twice to open the windows.
Press down on the front of the convertible top switch
twice to close the windows.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

REAR LIFTGATE/DECKLID RELEASE
You can open the rear liftgate/decklid by using the
handle located on the liftgate/decklid just above the rear
license plate pocket.

WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the rear cargo
area by climbing into the rear cargo area from outside. Always close the liftgate/decklid when your
vehicle is unattended. Once in the cargo area, young
children may have difficulty leaving the vehicle. If
trapped in the cargo area, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the lap/
shoulder seat belts for the driver and passenger, emergency tensioning retractors for the seat belts, and front
and side airbags for the driver and passenger. If you will
be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, the
passenger side seat belt also can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.

WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
occupants, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives. They also
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts provide protection from that,
and they reduce the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle needs
to be buckled up all the time.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
Each seating position is equipped with a combined
lap/shoulder belt system.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the belt to move freely with you under normal

conditions. In a collision, the belt locks and reduces the
risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out. The seat belts are also equipped with emergency tensioning retractors. These tensioning retractors
are located in each belt’s inertia reel and become operationally ready with the key in the ignition switch turned
to the ACC or ON/RUN positions. The emergency
tensioning retractors are designed to activate during
frontal and rear impacts. They remove slack from the
belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body, restricting its forward movement as
much as possible.
In cases of other frontal impacts, roll overs, certain side
impacts, rear collisions or other accidents without sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver and
passenger will then be protected by the fastened seat
belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Unless the key is
in the ACC or ON position, seat will not move. Sit back
and adjust the seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a little on the shoulder belt, as shown.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate
away from you and pull on the lap belt. Remember that
a snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
7. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow it to retract fully.

WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.

Seat belt systems must always be replaced after an
impact severe enough to fire the emergency locking
retractors. If there is any question about the condition of your seat belt system, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for an inspection.

• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is
straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer and have it
fixed.

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
extender. This extender should be used only if the
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
extender when the lap belt is not long enough when
it is worn low and snug, and in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the extender
when not needed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag

This vehicle has airbags for the driver and passenger as a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s
airbag is mounted in the steering wheel. The passenger
frontal airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, under
a cover marked SRS/AIRBAG.
These airbags inflate in higher speed frontal impacts.
They work with the instrument panel inflatable knee
blockers and the seat belts to provide improved protection for the driver and passenger.
The vehicle is also equipped with side airbags, located in
the driver and passenger doors. Side airbags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
NOTE: The front driver airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment. The front
driver airbag has a multi stage inflator design. This may
allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that
are based on collision severity and occupant size. Also,
the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
“Occupant Classification System” in this section). Their
covers are also labeled SRS/AIRBAG.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers are designed to open only
when the airbags are inflated.
• Do not place objects between you and the side
airbags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
• Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on
or around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive objects into occupants, causing serious
injury.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy
even when the driver front airbag has deployed if the
Occupant Classification System (refer to “Occupant Classification System” in this section) has determined the seat

is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in
the “child” category. This could be a child, a teenager, or
even a small adult. The side airbags on the crash side of
the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. However even in collisions where the airbags
work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy only in moderate
to severe front collisions. In certain types of collisions,
both the front and side airbags may be triggered.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Infants in rear-facing child safety seats should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger frontal
airbag unless the airbag is shut OFF. See “Passenger
Airbag On/Off Switch” and “To Shut Off the Passenger
Airbag.” The rear-facing seat places them too close to the
passenger air bag in the event of a crash. An airbag
deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in
this position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on “Child Restraint”) should
be secured in child safety seats or booster seats that are
appropriate for the child’s age, height, and weight.
Older children who do not use child safety seats or
booster seats should ride properly buckled. Never allow
children to place the shoulder belt behind them or under
the arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the vehicle,
move the seat as far back as possible, shut off the
passenger airbag, and use the proper child restraint. See
the section on “Child Restraint.”

You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat to make
sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
3. The driver and passenger seats should be moved back
as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door, as the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door. (See the section on “Side Airbags.”)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

After installing a child safety seat or booster seat on
the passenger seat, do not adjust the back rest forward. This could cause a higher load being perceived
by the OCS system which in turn could lead to the
passenger airbag being turned on. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious or fatal injury. It
is always recommended to turn off the passenger
front air bags using the passenger front airbags
on/off switch located at the right end of the instrument panel when the passenger is:

• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.

• an infant (less than 1 year old),
• a child, age 1 to 12,
• an adult with a medical condition which makes
passenger airbags inflation (deployment) a greater
risk for the passenger than the risk of hitting the
dashboard (instrument panel) or windshield in a
crash.
The on/off switch is accessible by opening the passenger door.

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury.
• Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
• The side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door. Sit upright in the center of
the seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver and passenger frontal airbag/inflator units
• Driver and passenger side airbag/inflator units
• Driver and Passenger Inflatable Knee Blocker
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Side impact sensors
• Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
How the Front Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
severity, the front control module determines the
proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation

from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size
provided by the Occupant Classification Module. The
ORC will not detect roll overs. The ORC monitors the
readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN
positions. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC
position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on
and will not inflate.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light
(located in the instrument cluster) and Passenger
Airbag Disable (PAD) indicator light (located in the
center console) for 4 seconds for a self-check when the
ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the
AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD indicator light will function normally (Refer to “Passenger
Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light” in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
momentarily or continuously.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.

WARNING!
Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are not there to protect you. These protective
covers are designed to open only when the airbags
are inflated.

• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50–70 milliseconds. This
is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger. The driver’s front airbag
gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The Knee Blocker Airbag helps protect the knees and
working with the seatbelts, position you for the best
interaction with the airbags.

If a Deployment Occurs

WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the impact
sensors detect a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, to
help restrain the driver and passenger, and then to
immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system. The system may also inflate only one airbag in a
reduced severity frontal collision if the seat belt on that
side of the vehicle is not fastened. This also does not
mean something is wrong with your airbag system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not
permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if
you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic nitrogen gas used
for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose

or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
How the Side Impact Airbag System Works
• The side impact airbags are located in the doors above
the armrest.
• The ORC determines if a side impact is severe enough
to require the airbag on the side of the vehicle subjected to an impact. As with the frontal system, the
sensors are connected to the diagnostic unit and the
airbag/inflator units.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• When a side impact above a predetermined threshold
occurs, the sensors signal the inflator on the impacted
side of the vehicle. A large quantity of nontoxic
nitrogen gas is generated to inflate the airbag. The
door panel opens to allow the airbag to inflate to its
full size.

WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers are designed to open only
when the airbags are inflated.
• Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on
or around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the objects into occupants, causing serious
injury.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• The operational readiness of the side airbag system is
verified by the airbag indicator light in the instrument
cluster when turning the key in the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position. If no fault is detected, the light
will go out after approximately four seconds. After the
light goes out, the system continues to monitor the
components and circuitry of the airbag system and
will indicate a malfunction by coming on again. If the
light does not come on at all, or if it fails to go out after
the four seconds, or if it comes on thereafter, a malfunction in the system has been detected. See your
authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!
• The door mounted side airbag deploys with considerable force. Being too close to the door panel
during airbag deployment could cause serious
injury or death.
• All occupants must be in the appropriate restraint
for their size and age, especially children 12 and
under.
• To help avoid the potential for serious injury and
death should the side airbag be activated, please
follow these guidelines:
1. Occupants, especially children, should never lean
against the door in the area where the side airbag
inflates;
2. Occupants need to sit upright in the center of the
seat to give the side airbag room to inflate;
3. Always use the appropriate restraint for the occupant and ensure it is properly used.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
System Works
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) will classify
an occupant in the front passenger seat into a size
category based on sensor readings from within the seat
cushion. Occupants should try to remain in a normally
seated position. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dashboard),
the OCS may not be able to properly approximate
occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the
seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, or objects
lodged underneath the seat. If there is a rapid change in
temperature or humidity, the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in
any way, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If
there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
warning light will light indicating that you should take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence of an
occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD indicator

light (located in the center console) and AIRBAG warning light (located in the instrument cluster) are illuminated the airbag will be disabled. The ORC will not allow
front airbag deployment in the event of a collision for
occupants classified into the empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light will illuminate indicating
that the Passenger Airbag is OFF when the OCS has
determined that the occupant size category is a child.
Also, when the seat is empty or an object that weighs less
than a predetermined threshold is placed on the seat, the
light will remain OFF. (The PAD indicator light is an
amber light located in the center console.) For almost all
sizes of properly seated adults, the passenger frontal
airbag will be enabled in the event of a collision. For
small teenagers and some small adults, depending on
size, the airbag may or may not be enabled in the event
of a collision. Both drivers and passengers should always
use the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front
passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD
indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passenger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the
seat until the light goes out. Remember, if the PAD
indicator light is illuminated the passenger front airbag

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

will not inflate. For most children properly seated on the
front seat and most properly installed child restraint
systems, the airbag will be disabled and the PAD indicator light will be on. However, under certain conditions
even with the child restraint system has been installed
properly, the PAD indicator light may not be on even
though the air bag is disabled. This can occur if the child
restraint is lighter than the threshold weight necessary to
turn the PAD indicator light on. If this happens to you,
you can check to ensure the airbag is disabled by
performing the following simple procedure. Place the
ignition key in the RUN position and apply downward
pressure to the child restraint on the surface that the child
will be sitting on. Slowly count to 10 and watch the PAD
indicator light. The PAD indicator light should turn on.
When you release the pressure, the PAD indicator light
may stay on or may turn off but the airbag is disabled. If
at all possible, place children 12 years and younger in a
back seat.

The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired.
• Always use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How the Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
Works
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
beneath the passenger seat.. The OCM classifies the
occupant into one of three size categories based on the
input from the Bladder Assembly and a Belt Tension
Sensor. The size categories include empty, child, and
adult. The OCM sends the Occupant Classification to the
ORC to determine if a front passenger airbag is allowed.
If a fault is present, the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated.
How the Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light Works
The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
indicates to the driver and passenger when the airbag is
turned OFF. In the presence of a properly seated occupant, when the PAD indicator light is illuminated, the
airbag is OFF. Also, when the Occupant Classification
System detects either an empty seat or a weight less than
the predetermined threshold, the ORC will not illuminate
the PAD indicator light even though the airbag is turned
OFF.

How the Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) Works
The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) is located at the outboard
passenger lap belt anchor. The BTS creates a signal based
on outboard lap belt tension. This signal is sent to the
OCM to ensure that the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied lap belt tension does not cause a
small occupant to be classified as a larger occupant
How the Bladder Mat and Pressure Sensor Works
The Bladder Mat and Pressure Sensor are located beneath
the seat cushion foam. The pressure sensor sends a signal
to the OCM. The passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning passenger seat components
are critical for the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
to properly classify the passenger and calculate the
proper airbag deployment. Do not make any modifications to the passenger seat components, assembly, or to
the seat cover.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How the Driver/Passenger Inflatable Knee
Blockers Works
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a collision
requiring the Driver/Passenger Inflatable Knee Blockers,
it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of nontoxic gas is
generated to inflate the Driver/Passenger Inflatable Knee
Blockers. The Driver/Passenger Inflatable Knee Blockers
inflates rearward towards the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position you for the best interaction
with the front airbag. The Driver/Passenger Inflatable
Knee Blockers fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds, this
is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your
eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to protect the
driver’s knees.
The Knee Impact Blockers help protect the knees and
position the occupant.
Passenger Front Airbag On/Off Switch
The ON/OFF switch is located at the right end of the
instrument panel and is accessible by opening the passenger door.

NOTE: When using certain types of child seats, the
passenger airbag light will remain off even though the
passenger front airbags are disabled.
It is always recommended to turn off the passenger front
air bags using the passenger front airbags on/off switch
located at the right end of the instrument panel when the
passenger is:
• an infant (less than 1 year old),
• a child, age 1 to 12,
• an adult with a medical condition which makes passenger airbag inflation (deployment) a greater risk for
the passenger than the risk of hitting the dashboard
(instrument panel) or windshield in a crash.
The on/off switch is accessible by opening the passenger
door.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the airbag is turned off when there is any other
occupant at that position, the supplemental restraint
provided by the airbag will not be available.

To turn OFF the passenger front airbag, use the on/off
switch located on the instrument panel.
NOTE: When the passenger airbag is turned off, the
yellow airbag off light will illuminate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag:

To Turn On the Passenger Airbag:

• Place the ignition key in the on/off switch, turn the
key clockwise, and remove the key from the switch.
This will shut off the passenger front airbag.

• Place the ignition key in the on/off switch, turn the
key counterclockwise, and remove the key from the
switch. This will turn on the passenger airbag. The
Passenger Airbag Off light on the console will turn off,
or will not be illuminated when the ignition is turned
to the ON position.

• The air bag will remain off until the switch is turned
back to the ON position.
• The switch does NOT turn off the side airbag.

WARNING!
The airbag may malfunction and serious injury could
result if key is left in the airbag shut off switch.
Always remove the key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service procedures
to the front passenger seat assembly, its related
components, or seat cover may inadvertently
change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal
crash. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not
comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSS).
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact blocker.
• You can be injured if you are too close to either
airbag cover when the airbags inflate. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system
yourself. Don’t try to repair the airbag system. Be
sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that
it has airbags.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready for
your protection in case of a collision. While the
airbag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the
system immediately.

Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

• The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the four seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.

WARNING!

• The light remains on or flickers after the four second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Infants and Child Restraints
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 9 kg (20 lbs.). Two
types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing:
infant carriers and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs. (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the

LATCH child restraint anchorage system. (See the
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System section.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.

WARNING!
• A rearward facing infant restraint must not be
used unless the passenger airbag has been shut
off. A rearward facing infant restraint may be
struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may
cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of a child
restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing
a child restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:

NOTE:
For additional information refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.

Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (See LATCH - Child Seat
Anchorage System section.)

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the seat
manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants and cause
serious personal injury.

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs. (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seat back, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.

LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for Children)
Your vehicle’s passenger seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s belts, instead securing the
child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether
straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraints are now available.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. These
are general instructions, and not all child restraint systems will be installed exactly as described here. Again,
carefully follow the installation instructions that were
provided with the child restraint system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The passenger seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seat back, and are just visible when you lean in to install
the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run
your finger along the intersection of the seat back and
seat cushion surfaces.

The passenger seat tether anchorage is located on the
back of the seat cushion frame. It is visible by moving the
passenger seat forward in the vehicle.

Many, but not all LATCH-Compatible child restraint
systems will be equipped with separate straps on each
side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting
the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints
and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to the
tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the
tension of the strap.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, you
can attach the tether strap to the anchor by moving the
passenger seat forward. Route the child restraint tether
directly over the top of the seat, through the strap near
the top of the seat back, and attach the hook to the anchor
bar. Recline the seat back and move the passenger seat as
far rearward as possible. Next, attach the lower hooks to
the passenger seat lower anchor bars by pushing aside
the seat cover material. Finally, tighten all three straps as
you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!
After installing a child safety seat or booster seat on
the passenger seat, do not adjust the back rest forward. This could cause a higher load being perceived
by the OCS system which in turn could lead to the
passenger airbag being turned on. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious or fatal injury. It
is always recommended to turn off the passenger
front air bags using the passenger front airbags
on/off switch located at the right end of the instrument panel when the passenger is:
• an infant (less than 1 year old),
• a child, age 1 to 12,
• an adult with a medical condition which makes
passenger airbags inflation (deployment) a greater
risk for the passenger than the risk of hitting the
dashboard (instrument panel) or windshield in a
crash.
The on/off switch is accessible by opening the passenger door.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraints can be securely fastened in the passenger
seat using the seat belts. For this purpose, the passenger
seat belt retractor provides two modes of operation normal emergency locking and automatic locking. For
child restraint installation, the retractor switches to automatic locking when the belt is pulled out to the full extent
of its travel. As the belt retracts, the retractor locks to
prevent the belt from being pulled out again. Pulling the
belt snugly over the child restraint toward the retractor
secures the restraint in place. When the belt retracts fully
after child restraint removal, normal (emergency locking)

retractor action is restored. Any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary.
If your child restraint is equipped with a tether strap,
attach it to the vehicle by first moving the seat back fully
forward. Next, route the child restraint tether directly
over the top of the seat, through the strap near the top of
the seat back, and attach the hook to the anchor bar.
Recline the seat back and move the passenger seat as far
rearward as possible. Remove slack in the tether strap as
you push the child restraint downward and rearward,
following the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor - General
Information
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for certain of their older
products. There is a tether strap anchor behind the
passenger seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To attach the tether strap to the anchor, move the
seatback fully forward. Pass the child restraint tether
hook over the top of the seat, through the strap near the
top of the seat back, and attach it to the anchor bar behind
the passenger seat, below the seatback. After securing the
tether hook to the bar, recline the seatback fully rearward
and move the seat to its most rearward position.

Install the child restraint and return the seatback to an
upright position. Remove slack from the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.

WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Deploying airbags could harm your pet. An unrestrained
pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
The engine in your new Crossfire does not require a long
break-in period. Following these few simple guidelines is
all that is necessary for a good break-in.
• Drive your vehicle at moderate vehicle and engine
speeds during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km).
• Do not make any full throttle starts and avoid full
throttle acceleration.
• Use the proper transmission gear for your speed
range.
• Avoid excessive idling.
• Check the engine oil level at every fuel fill.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during the
first few thousand miles of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not an
indication of a problem.

SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower
at high speed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• To avoid drawing exhaust gases into the vehicle, close
the rear liftgate/decklid while driving. However, if for
some reason it must remain open, close all windows.
Adjust the heating or cooling system to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor
condition, see your authorized dealer.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the bulb is not lit

during starting, have it replaced. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Defrosters
Check operation by pressing the A/C control button,
selecting the defrost mode and placing the blower control
on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed
against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires for
proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are
present, the cause should be corrected immediately.

NOTE: Use of the air conditioning may cause puddles
of water to form under the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS

m Convertible Top Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ To Lower The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ To Raise The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .77

▫ Convertible Top Lamp And Audible
Signal Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped) . .77

m Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Storage Compartments (If Equipped) . . . . . . . .73
▫ Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
m Cupholder (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors . . . . . .78
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Manual Seat Adjustments (If Equipped) . . . . . .80
▫ Driver Eight-Way Power Seat (If Equipped) . . . .82
▫ Passenger Four-Way Power Seat (If Equipped) . .83

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Heated Seats (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

▫ Windshield Wipers And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . .90

m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

▫ Mist Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

m Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

m Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

m Tire Pressure Monitor System (If Equipped) . . .93

▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

m Rear Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

▫ Instrument Panel Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

m Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

▫ Night Security Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

m Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . .99

m Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .86

m Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

▫ Daytime Running Lights (Where Applicable) . . .87

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

▫ Fog Lights (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

▫ Standing Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

m Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

▫ Using Speed Control On Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

m Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . 105

▫ Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver . . . . . 106

▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 108

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Using The Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

▫ Erasing Universal Transceiver Buttons . . . . . . . 109

m Umbrella Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

▫ Reprogramming a Single Button . . . . . . . . . . . 109

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION

WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision. Therefore,
it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts
at all times when riding in a convertible. Studies
have shown that it is generally safer to remain inside
a vehicle during a collision than to be ejected from
the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the convertible top should only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still. Top
operation is allowed up to a maximum of 9 mph (15
km/h). Above this speed, top operation will cease and an
audible warning will sound. The top operation can be
resumed after the vehicle is below the maximum speed
by pressing the convertible top switch again.

WARNING!
Before operating the switch for the convertible top,
make sure that no persons can be injured by the
moving parts (convertible top frame and tonneau
cover).
Hands must never be placed near the sport bar,
convertible top frame, upper windshield area, shelf
behind sport bar, or convertible top storage compartment while the convertible top is being raised or
lowered. Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the convertible top
switch. This immediately interrupts the raising or
lowering procedure. You then can operate the convertible top switch to raise or lower the convertible
top away from the danger zone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
When opening and closing the convertible top, make
sure that:
• There is sufficient clearance of at least 6 ft. (1.8m)
for the convertible top to move up.
• Nothing is placed on the tonneau cover.
• The outside temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Otherwise the convertible top and other parts of the
vehicle could be damaged.

CAUTION!
Use caution when putting items into the storage
compartment with the top in the closed position. The
tonneau cover extensions are exposed and can be
damaged if luggage or other items are pushed too far
into the storage compartment.

To Lower The Top:

WARNING!
Top operation can be suspended for a maximum of 10
minutes. Thirty seconds before the end of this period
an audible warning will begin to sound continuously. At the end of this period, hydraulic pressure
will be released and the top and tonneau cover will
slowly collapse. In order to re-initialize the top cycle,
the tonneau cover must first be moved and held in its
full open position manually. The convertible top
should then be carefully lowered into its storage
compartment, and the tonneau closed. Hands should
be kept away from moving parts of the top and top
compartment mechanisms to avoid injury during this
operation and as hydraulic pressure is reestablished.
The hydraulic pressure can be reestablished by turning the ignition to the ON/RUN position and pushing down on the convertible top switch twice. Refer
to Convertible Top Emergency Operation in the What
To Do In Emergencies section of this manual.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

To avoid possible damage to the tonneau cover and
convertible top, do not allow the convertible top to
remain in the suspended position. After approximately 10 minutes in the suspended position, the
hydraulic pressure will be released which will allow
the top and the tonneau cover to lower. The convertible top switch can be pressed to cancel this
operation.

To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that
the vehicle is at a complete stop before attempting to
lower or raise the top.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to either the top or the rear window,
check the tonneau cover area at the rear of the vehicle
interior to be sure that it is clear of debris or other
items. Do not use the tonneau cover area for other
storage purposes.

NOTE: If the top stops during the raising or lowering
procedure, start the engine and continue operation.
1. Make sure the rear cargo compartment divider is
unfolded and secured in the vertical position.
If the divider is in its stowed position, first unfold the
panels towards the rear of the vehicle. Pull up on the
vertical panel using the center cutout shown, and hook
the pins at the top into the brackets mounted to the cargo
compartment trim on each side near the forward edge of
the decklid opening. The pins must be hooked in these
brackets in order for the top to operate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: See label attached to underside of decklid.

2. Make sure the decklid is closed.

CAUTION!
Be sure to turn the ignition to the “ON/RUN” position before releasing the top from the windshield
header. The windows will not go down if the top is
released from the header without the ignition turned
“ON”. The side windows can be damaged if the
doors are opened or closed with the windows up and
the top released from the windshield header.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position.
4. Unlock the top from the windshield header by pulling
the latch handle down and turning it clockwise just over
one quarter turn.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Once the release handle is rotated, the windows
will automatically go down.

5. Push up on the convertible top latch handle to create a
gap between the header and top of approximately 8
inches (200 mm). As soon as the top is free, rotate the
latch handle counterclockwise just over one quarter turn
and push it up into the stored position.
NOTE: Failure to perform any of these steps will
prevent the top from operating with the convertible top
switch and will cause an audible information signal to
sound.

6. Push down on the rear of the convertible top switch to
begin top operation. The rear of the top will unlatch and
the tonneau cover will open before the top begins to fold.
Hold the switch down until the convertible top is completely lowered into its storage compartment and the
tonneau cover is closed and latched. A single audible
signal will sound to indicate completion of the top
opening operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Once the top is lowered and the audible signal
is heard, you can continue to push the convertible top
switch down or push it within 2 seconds to raise the
windows.
The windows can also be closed/opened later using the
power window switches.

CAUTION!
To prevent mildew, the convertible top must be dry
before lowering it into the storage compartment.
Do not lower a frozen convertible top until thawed
and dry. Doing so may result in damage not covered
by the DaimlerChrysler Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!
Do not place anything on the tonneau cover.
The tonneau cover must never be used as a seating
area.
To Raise The Top:
1. Make sure the rear cargo compartment divider is still
secured in the vertical position.
2. Make sure the decklid is closed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position and
press down on the front of the convertible top switch.

NOTE: If the top is latched to the windshield header
before the rear of the top is properly latched, an audible
warning will sound and the top raising operation will
stop.
5. Pull the latch handle down from the storage position
and turn it clockwise just over one quarter turn.
6. Pull the latch handle and convertible top down to
engage the top with the header.

4. If the windows are raised, they will lower as soon as
the convertible switch is pressed down. The tonneau
cover will open, and the top will then close until it
reaches approximately 8 inches (200 mm) from the
header. The tonneau cover will then close and the rear of
the top will close and latch. At the completion of this
cycle, a single audible signal will sound.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

7. When the top engages to the header, turn the latch
handle counterclockwise just over one quarter turn to the
lock position and push the latch handle up to the stored
position. The top is now secured in the closed position.
NOTE: The convertible top switch indicator will light
up and an audible warning will be heard if you start
driving the vehicle without the top fully locked in the
closed position.

WARNING!
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only
with the convertible top either completely closed and
locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment.
8. Once the top has been raised and locked, the cargo
compartment divider can be unhooked and folded forward to increase the cargo compartment capacity. Follow
the steps shown on the label affixed to the decklid trim.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Once the cargo compartment divider is folded forward to increase the cargo compartment capacity, the
tonneau cover flaps are exposed and can be damaged
by long items being put into the cargo compartment.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Convertible Top Lamp and Audible Signal Chart
Below is a table containing all of the visual and audible
signals that can be seen or heard during top operation or
if a fault is present.
Visual and Audible Sig- Operation Mode or Fault
nals
Single audible signal is
Roof reaches fully open
heard
position
Roof reaches fully closed
position
Convertible top switch
Decklid open
lamp flashes slowly and a
slow audible beep is
heard
Cargo compartment divider not secured in vertical position
Top latched at windshield
header before top cycle
complete

Convertible top switch
lamp flashes quickly and
a quick audible beep is
heard

Convertible top switch
lamp flashes rapidly

Top unlatched but not
pushed up from windshield header
Vehicle speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h) while
trying to initiate top operation
Battery voltage less than
10.6 Volts
Maximum hydraulic
pump run-time reached

Power window motor(s)
or rear spoiler inoperative
Vehicle speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h) during
top operation
Top operation suspended
longer than 10 minutes
General top control module fault

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has a power outlet/cigar lighter, an ash tray
with a coin holder, a cupholder (if equipped), and the
passenger airbag light. In addition, there are switches to
control the heated seats (if equipped), rear spoiler, electronic stability program (ESP), hazard flashers, central
locking, rear defroster and towing alarm.
Operating controls for the heating and air conditioning
systems, power windows, power mirrors, convertible top
switch (if equipped), and the automatic transmission
program mode selector switch (if equipped) are also
located in the console.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Storage Compartments (If Equipped)
There is a storage compartment in the console. To open
the storage compartment, lift the lid with the finger
depressions on either side. To close, lower the lid until
the lock engages.

Additionally, storage pockets are located on the wall
behind each seat and on each door panel.
A storage pouch is located on the rear wall between the
seats, and the driver’s sunvisor has a document strap.
On some models, a cargo net for storage is located in the
footwell area on the passenger side.

WARNING!
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to
prevent stored objects from being thrown about and
injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ashtray
Lightly touch the bottom of the ashtray cover. The
ashtray will open automatically.
To remove the ashtray insert, pull the ashtray past the
detent. Hold both sides of the insert, and pull up. To
install the ashtray, place it in the frame and push down to
engage.

WARNING!
Remove the ashtray only with the vehicle stopped
and the ignition off. Otherwise, the vehicle might
move unexpectedly as a result of unintended contact
with the gear selector lever.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Coin Holder
With the ashtray open, folding down the cover plate
reveals the coin holder, which can accommodate nine
coins in various sizes up to a U.S. quarter. The coin slots
are shaped to retain the coins, and the cover plate ensures
that the coins remain in the coin holder.

Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
The dual-purpose power outlet is located in the console,
next to the passenger airbag off warning light. The power
outlet can accommodate a lighter or electrical accessories

up to a maximum of 15 amps. The outlet is protected by
a 15 amp fuse, located behind the fuse cover on the left
end of the instrument panel.

The lighter will operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON/ACC position. It heats up when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Glove Compartment
To lock the glove compartment, turn the key to the right
and remove. To unlock, turn the key to the left and
remove.
Pull on the handle to open the glove compartment.
CUPHOLDER (If Equipped)
The cupholder is located in the console. To open the
cupholder, gently press downward on the front edge of
the top panel, and then release. The cupholder will open
automatically.
When the cupholder is no longer needed, push forward
on the top edge of the door and rotate it down into the
console until it engages.
The cupholder is designed to hold beverage containers
up to 20 oz. (1 L).

CAUTION!
Only use containers that fit into the cupholder.
Overfilled containers could spill during vehicle
maneuvers.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged to move forward or
rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent
positions: full forward, full rearward, and normal.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped)
Both outside mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice when
the Rear Window Defroster switch is depressed.
Outside Mirrors
Adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane
of traffic, with a slight overlap of the view seen in the
inside mirror.

WARNING!

Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle) The mirror should be adjusted
with the glare control set in the day position (toward
windshield).

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they actually are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror to judge the size or distance of objects seen in
the convex mirror.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors
The mirrors can be adjusted by using the remote control
located in the console. Rotate the switch to the right to
select the right mirror, rotate to the left to select the left
mirror. Then use the switch to adjust the selected mirror
to the desired direction.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vanity Mirrors

SEATS
Your vehicle’s seats can be adjusted either manually or
electrically, depending on how your vehicle is equipped.

WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

A vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use the mirror,
rotate the sun visor down and slide open the mirror
cover.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: When moving the seat, be sure that there are no
items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you
could damage the seats.

Manual Seat Adjustments (If Equipped)
Seat Height (Drivers Seat Only)
• Pull up on handle 3.
• To lower the seat, use your body weight to push the
seat downward.
• To raise the seat, lift your body weight off the seat to
obtain a higher seat position.
• Release handle 3 when you are at your desired seat
level.
Forward/Rearward
• Pull up on handle 4.
• Move the seat forward or backward to your desired
position which allows you to reach the pedals comfortably.
• Let go of handle 4. The seat should make an audible
click when positioned properly.
• Check for proper engagement before driving.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Backrest Tilt
• Turn handwheel 2 forward or backward to adjust the
backrest tilt to your desired position which allows
your arms to slightly bend when holding the steering
wheel.
Head Restraint Height

WARNING!
For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head
approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during and accident.

• Adjust the height of the head restraints by pulling
them upwards manually.
• For a lower position, press release button 1 and push
down on the head restraints manually.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows
you to reach the accelerator and brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent
with ability to properly operate controls.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Driver Eight-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)
The switches to adjust the power seats are located on the
outboard side of each seat. The driver’s seat features
eight-way power adjustment - horizontal, vertical, cushion tilt and back angle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Passenger Four-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)
The switches to adjust the passenger seat are also on the
outboard side of the seat. The passenger seat provides
four-way adjustment - horizontal and back angle.

After turning the ignition switch ON, you can choose the
HI, LO, or OFF setting. Indicators on the switches show
which setting has been selected.
Heated Seats (If Equipped)
This feature heats the driver and passenger seats. The
controls for the heated seats are located on the instrument
panel, below the radio.

The heated seats setting will automatically switch from
HI to LO after approximately 5 minutes.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, pull the release lever located inside
your vehicle, below the instrument panel.

WARNING!
Then, reach under the hood and pull upward on the
safety latch and lift the hood.
To prevent possible damage, close the hood by dropping
it from approximately 12 inches (30 cm).

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving, and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

INTERIOR LIGHTS
A two-position mode selector switch controls the interior
lights located in the overhead console.

Front Map/Reading Lights
These lights are located between the sun visors. A single
centrally located switch operates both lights.

The AUTO mode turns the lights on when a door is open
or ajar, or when locking or unlocking the vehicle. AUTO
mode also has a “fade to off” feature. When the doors are
closed or locked, they gradually “fade” off.
The OFF position turns off the interior lights feature.

Battery Saver Feature
To prevent battery drain if a door is left open or ajar, the
interior lights will turn off automatically after 15 minutes.
After the door is closed, the interior lights will return to
their normal function.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Instrument Panel Lighting
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
dimmer control to the left of the speedometer to increase
or decrease brightness of the instrument panel.

Night Security Illumination
For added security when exiting the vehicle after driving
with the exterior lights on, the lights will switch on again
for approximately 30 seconds after closing the last door.
The lights-on timing can be changed at your authorized
dealer.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights and Parking Lights
When the headlight switch is turned clockwise from OFF
to the first position, the parking lights, taillights, side
marker lights, license plate lights and instrument panel
lights are all illuminated.

The headlights turn on when the switch is turned to the
second position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned off, a warning will sound if the driver’s
door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights (Where Applicable)
VEHICLES WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The low beam headlights, parking lights, side marker
lights, taillights and license plate lights are automatically
switched on whenever the vehicle is started and the
transmission gear selector is in a driving position.
VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The low beam headlights, parking lights, side marker
lights, taillights, and license plate lights are automatically
switched on whenever the vehicle is started and the
parking brake is released.
For nighttime driving, the exterior lights switch should
be in the low beam position to permit activation of the
high beam headlights.

Fog Lights (If Equipped)
To operate the fog lights, pull the headlight
switch out one stop, with the parking lights
and/or low beam headlights on. A light to the
lower left of the headlight switch will illuminate when the fog lights are on.
To turn off the fog lights, push the headlight switch in
fully. Selecting high beam headlights will also turn off the
fog lights.
Standing Lights
When the vehicle is parked on the street, the standing
lights (left or right side parking lights) can be turned on,
making your vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.
To operate the standing lights, turn the headlight switch
counterclockwise one stop (right lamps) or two stops (left
lamps) from the OFF position. To turn off the standing
lights, return the headlight switch to the OFF position.
The standing lights cannot be operated when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Standing lamps are intended for short term use when
parking. If these lights are left on for a long period of
time, your car’s battery may drain, causing a possible
starting problem. Assure that the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position when leaving the vehicle.

MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER

Turn Signals
Move the multifunction control lever up to activate the
right turn signal; move the lever down to activate the left
turn signal. An arrow on the inside of the speedometer
will flash to indicate operation.
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing
lanes, move the control lever just to the point of resistance, and hold it there.
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the control lever up or down past the point of resistance. The
operation is automatically canceled when the steering
wheel is turned to a large enough degree.
If one of the turn signal lights fail, the turn signal
indicator system flashes and sounds at a faster than
normal rate. If an indicator fails to light when the control
lever is moved, it may mean that the fuse or indicator
bulb is defective.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Headlight Dimmer Switch
Push the multifunction control lever toward the instrument panel to turn the headlights to high beam. Pull the
lever toward you to switch to low beam.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction control lever toward the
steering wheel. This will cause the headlights to turn on
at high beam and remain on until the control lever is
released.

Windshield Wipers And Washer
The wipers and washer are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the lever to
select desired wiper speed: off, intermittent, normal, or
fast.

NOTE: Wiper speed is altered when the vehicle is
stopped with the wipers on. If the speed setting is
intermittent, the wipers will stop wiping when the vehicle comes to a complete stop. If the wiper speed setting
is normal, the wipers will change to intermittent wiping
when the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Push the end of the lever inward and hold it to activate
the wiper and washer together.

WARNING!
Mist Function
Push the end of the multifunction control lever inward
briefly for a single wipe without adding washer fluid.
Use this feature only when the windshield is wet.

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
Unlock the steering column by pulling out the handle
located directly below the column. The indicator light
located in the instrument cluster will come on. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull out or push
in the steering wheel. Lock the steering column in
position by pushing the handle in until it engages. The
indicator light in the instrument cluster will go out.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
NOTE: If the indicator light in the instrument cluster
does not go out after starting the engine, the telescoping
column is not locked properly. Do not drive the vehicle
until you have properly locked the steering column.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

more of your tires is significantly under—inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure, Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduced fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (if equipped)
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when on or

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system uses wireless
technology to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit
tire pressure readings to a receiver located inside the
vehicle.
NOTE: The TPM system can inform you about a low
tire pressure condition, but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. The TPM system is not intended to provide
you with notification of rapid tire pressure loss.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The TPM system will cause the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster to illuminate whenever the pressure in
one tire falls 25% below the recommended pressure
shown on the vehicle’s tire label.
NOTE: The pressure in your tires changes with temperature. A significant decrease in temperature could
reduce cold inflation pressure below the TPM setpoint.
For example, tires inflated to the proper cold inflation
pressure on a warm day or in a warm garage could
illuminate the TPM indicator lamp on the following day
if the temperature is very cold. ALWAYS check the
pressure in your tires if the TPM lamp is illuminated.

CAUTION!
The TPM system is designed to monitor your tire
pressure and will not function as a tire pressure
gauge. After adjusting the air pressure in a tire, there
will be a delay before the system updates the display.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The standard TIREFIT system (refer to What To
Do In Emergencies for more information) is specifically
designed to operate in conjunction with the TPM system,
and will not damage the sensors.
If your tire pressure is low, you should correct your tire
inflation pressure as soon as possible and inspect all of
your tires. Low tire pressure will cause the tire pressure
light to illuminate. They will remain on for the rest of the
driving cycle, or until the tire pressure is corrected.

CAUTION!
The TPM system has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPM system pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not
use aftermarket tire sealant or balance beads, as
damage to the sensors may result.

In addition to monitoring tire pressures, the TPM system
also monitors faults within the system. If the TPM light
and alarm continue after the tire pressure has been
corrected, see your authorized dealer.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes and modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REAR SPOILER

CAUTION!
Do not push or pull on the spoiler when deployed.
Damage to the spoiler could result.
A rear spoiler enhances vehicle stability. The rear spoiler
deploys automatically when vehicle speed reaches approximately 62 mph (100 km/h). The spoiler begins to
retract at 39 mph (62 km/h). When retracted, the spoiler
fits between the quarter panels, and aft of the liftgate
window or tonneau cover.

The spoiler can also be deployed at lower speeds using
an override switch mounted in the center console.
Once manually deployed, the spoiler will only retract by
pressing the bottom of the spoiler switch. The spoiler will
then retract in steps as long as the switch is depressed. If
the switch is depressed until the spoiler is fully retracted,
a short beep will be heard, and automatic control will be
reestablished.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The spoiler control also incorporates an emergency stop
feature. If, for any reason, spoiler motion needs to be
stopped, pressing either the top or bottom of the switch
will stop the spoiler motion. Once the deployment speed
is reached, however, the spoiler deploys to its full up
position.
The spoiler will deploy as a safety precaution if the ESP
system detects a large difference in wheel speed between
the front and rear wheels. This could occur as a result of
a speed signal malfunction, or could occur if the vehicle
is attempting to accelerate on a low friction surface
causing the rear wheels to spin. The spoiler will remain
deployed and the warning light in the spoiler switch will
blink until the vehicle is restarted. If the spoiler continues
to deploy in this fashion below the normal deployment
speed, see your authorized dealer.

Should a malfunction occur that prevents the spoiler
from deploying automatically, a red warning light will
illuminate in the override switch and an audible warning
will sound.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle at speeds above 62 mph (100
km/h) if the red spoiler warning indicator is illuminated. You could have reduced vehicle stability and
control.

WARNING!
Keep hands and fingers away from the spoiler and
spoiler linkage when the spoiler is deploying or
retracting. The linkage could pinch your fingers and
cause serious injury.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS)

WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system applies maximum power boost to the brakes
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s braking style. This can help reduce braking distances. The

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum BAS
assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous full braking power during the stopping
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.

turned to the ON/RUN position. They should go out
with the engine running. If the BAS/ESP malfunction
indicator light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either system.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have
the BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP)

WARNING!

The malfunction indicator lamp for the Electronic Stability Program is combined with the BAS. The yellow
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light in the instrument
cluster and the yellow ESP warning light in the speedometer dial come on with the key in the ignition switch

ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

100

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The ESP enhances directional control and reduces driving
wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
The ESP system corrects for over/understeering of the
vehicle by applying brakes to the appropriate wheel.
Engine torque is also limited. The ESP warning light,
located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,
switch off the ESP system by pressing the upper half of
the ESP switch.

With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable. ESP always operates under braking, even with the switch in the
OFF position. If one drive wheel loses traction and begins
to spin, the brake is applied by the ESP system until the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

wheel regains sufficient traction. The traction control
engages at approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and
switches off at 50 mph (80 km/h).
If the ESP warning light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road conditions. When the ESP warning
light is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off.
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP,
press the lower half of the switch (the ESP warning light
in the speedometer dial goes out). Avoid spinning one
drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drive
train and is not covered by the DaimlerChrysler warranty.

101

Synchronizing ESP
If the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light may be illuminated with the engine running. To
re-synchronize the ESP, and cancel the malfunction indicator light, the steering angle sensor will need to be
recalibrated.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Rotate the steering wheel to the center position.
3. Rotate the steering wheel completely to the left, and
then rotate the steering wheel completely to the right.
4. Bring the steering wheel back to the center position.
5. The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light will go out.

CAUTION!
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the
engine must be shut off (key in the ignition switch to
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position). Otherwise the ESP
will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear
wheel brakes.

If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light is still illuminated, the vehicle should be serviced at an authorized
dealer.

102

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
The electronic speed control automatically maintains the
set speed by actively regulating the throttle setting. Any
speed above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) can be
maintained with the electronic speed control by operating the lever.

To accelerate and set a speed, lift the lever up. Lift and
hold the lever to accelerate, or lift and release to set a
speed. To decelerate and set a speed, press the lever
down. Press down and hold the lever to decelerate, or
press down and release to set a speed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

103

To Vary The Speed Setting
If a set speed needs to be adjusted slightly, lift up or hold
down the speed control lever briefly until the desired
speed is reached. A single tap on the lever up or down
will change the speed in 0.6 mph (1 km/h) increments.
When the lever is released, the newly set speed remains.
To increase the speed for passing, use the accelerator.
After the accelerator is released, the previously set speed
will resume automatically.

WARNING!
Leaving the electronic speed control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

104

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle, will deactivate the speed
control without erasing the memory. Pushing the speed
control lever forward or turning the key in the ignition
switch to the OFF/LOCK position will turn off the speed
control and erase the memory.

To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, pull the speed control
lever toward you, and then release. The resume feature
can be used at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

NOTE: Moving the gear selector lever to the “N”
position will switch the speed control off (automatic
transmission only).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using Speed Control On Hills
Your vehicle is equipped with interactive speed control.
This feature activates when driving up or down hills with
the speed control engaged and the driver’s foot off the
accelerator.

WARNING!
Speed control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
For vehicles with automatic transmission:
On a downgrade or an upgrade, downshifting will occur
automatically to allow the engine’s braking power to
maintain the set speed. When more level roadway is
reached, the transmission will automatically upshift to
fifth gear.

105

For vehicles with manual transmission:
The set speed control is switched off when declutching
exceeds four seconds during downshifting. In some
cases, you may have to step on the brake pedal to slow
down sufficiently to achieve the desired speed.
NOTE: On very steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain
may occur. It may be preferable to drive without speed
control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (If Equipped)
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand-held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. The transceiver triggers these
devices at the push of a button. The transceiver operates
off your vehicle’s battery and charging system: no batteries are needed.
For additional information on HomeLinkt, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.

106

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature, as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features, as it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information and assistance.

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s engine while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.

Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
1. Turn off the engine.

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or
pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving
door or gate can cause serious injury or death to
people and pets or damage to objects.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
overhead console display begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
NOTE: Step 3 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand-held transmitters.
4. Choose one of the three buttons to program. Place the
hand-held controller 1–3 inches (25–76 mm) from the
universal transceiver while keeping its indicator light in
view.

107

5. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired universal transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until Step 6 has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 5 with
procedures noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
6. The indicator light in the universal transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid flash. If, after 90 seconds, the indicator does not
flash rapidly or goes out, return to Step 1 and repeat the
procedure.
7. Press and hold the just programmed universal transceiver button and observe the indicator light. If the
indicator stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when the universal
transceiver button is pressed and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two universal transceiver buttons, begin with Programming Step 4. Do not
repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3.

108

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Programming Steps 8-10 to complete programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a
garage door opener).
8. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
9. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 10.
10. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed universal transceiver button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence
a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage
door opener (or other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.

The universal transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
If you do not successfully program the universal transceiver to learn the signal of your hand-held transmitter,
call toll free for customer assistance at 1-800-355-3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for the
universal transceiver to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the programming
procedures (regardless of where you live), replace Programming Step 5 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
“cycling” process to prevent possible overheating.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. Continue to press and hold the universal transceiver
button while you press and release every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has successfully been accepted by the universal
transmitter. (The indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly.) Proceed with Programming Step 6 to
complete.
Using the Universal Transceiver
To operate the universal transceiver, simply press and
release the programmed button. Activation will now
occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock,
home/office lighting, etc.) For convenience, the handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any
time.
Erasing Universal Transceiver Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed – see
below), follow this procedure:
• Press and hold the two outer universal transceiver
buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer

109

than 30 seconds. The universal transceiver is now in
the program (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming
Step 4.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device using a universal transceiver button
previously programmed, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired universal transceiver button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the universal transceiver button, proceed with Programming Step 4.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously programmed frequencies,
hold down both outside buttons until the light begins to
flash.

110

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLinkt is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.

UMBRELLA HOOK
Your Crossfire is equipped with an umbrella hook. This
feature is located behind and between the two seats, just
above the map pocket.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

▫ Driver – L/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

m Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

▫ Telephone Mute Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 133

m Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

m Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

m “Infinity Modulus” AM/FM Stereo Radio With
Single-Disc CD Player And GPS Navigation . . 126

m Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

m AM/FM Stereo Radio With Single-Disc
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

▫ Infinity Modulus Entertainment Systems . . . . . 126

▫ Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 135
▫ Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

▫ Basic Setting - Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

▫ User Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Basic Setting - Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ User Memory (User – 1, 2, 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

▫ Dust Filter (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

▫ Mono/Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

112

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
The instrument cluster displays are activated by either
opening the door, pressing the left button within the

113

cluster, or turning the key in the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position.

114

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Low Windshield Washer System Fluid Level
Warning Light
With the key in the ignition switch turned to
the ON/RUN position, the indicator light
comes on. It should go out when the engine
is running.
If the indicator light does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, the fluid reservoir
is less than 1⁄4 filled.
The reservoir should be refilled at the next opportunity
with commercially available premixed windshield
washer solvent/antifreeze or water, depending on ambient temperature.
The reservoir for the windshield washer system is located
in the engine compartment and the cap is marked with
the above symbol.

WARNING!
Do not overfill the washer reservoir. Do not attempt
to fill to the top of the filler neck. Fluid may leak out
onto the floor or driveway causing a potential slip
and fall hazard. When the indicator light first illuminates, the maximum fill amount is 1 Gallon (4 Liters).
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
The tire pressure monitor system (TPMS)
uses wireless technology to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
If the light is illuminated, the pressure in one of the tires
on the vehicle has dropped to at least 25% below the
recommended pressure on the vehicle’s tire label. Additionally, the indicator light will illuminate if a fault has
been detected in the TPMS.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
The TPMS is designed to monitor your tire pressure
and will not function as a tire pressure gauge. After
adjusting the air pressure in a tire, there will be a
delay before the system updated the display

115

level in the reservoir or the coolant temperature is too
high (see the Temperature gauge section).
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on
level ground and the engine stopped.
Check coolant level only when the coolant is cold.

WARNING!
NOTE: The TPMS can inform you about a low tire
pressure condition, but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. The TPMS is not intended to provide you
with notification of a rapid pressure loss.
NOTE: The pressure in your tires changes with temperature. A significant decrease in temperature could
reduce cold inflation pressure below the TPMS setpoint.
ALWAYS check pressure in your tires if the TPMS telltale
lamp is illuminated.
3. Coolant Indicator Light
This indicator illuminates when the engine
coolant has dropped below the required

You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
or coolant bottle is hot.
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
This gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading between the Hot and Cold gauge marks show that the
engine cooling system is operating properly. The gauge
pointer may show a higher temperature when driving in
hot weather, up mountain grades, or in heavy stop-andgo-traffic.

116

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the pointer rises to the red (Hot) area, stop the vehicle
and turn off the engine until the problem is corrected.

down. The switch is automatically canceled when the
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.

CAUTION!

The arrows in the instrument cluster will flash in unison
with the respective exterior turn signal.

Continuing to drive with an overheated engine cooling system can cause damage to the engine or other
components.
5. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the tank.
The arrow to the right of the gas pump symbol shows
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located on.
6. Turn Signal Indicators
To signal minor directional changes, such as
changing lanes, move the multifunction control lever to the point of resistance only and
hold it there. The arrows will flash in unison
with the corresponding exterior turn signal.
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the multifunction control lever past the point of resistance up or

7. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light
The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedometer dial comes on with the key in the ignition
switch turned to the ON/RUN position. It
should go out with the engine running.
If the ESP indicator light flashes during acceleration,
apply as little throttle as possible. While driving, ease up
on the accelerator. Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP.
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles-perhour and/or kilometers-per-hour.
9. Tachometer
This gauge shows engine speed in revolutions-perminute (RPM) times 1,000.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The red markings on the tachometer indicate excessive
engine speed. Ease off on the accelerator before reaching
the red area.
10. Brake System Warning Light
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capability if a failure occurs in a
portion of the hydraulic system.
This light monitors both the brake fluid level and the
parking brake. If the light comes on, it indicates either
that the parking brake is on or there is a low fluid level in
the brake master cylinder. Since this vehicle is equipped
with anti-lock brakes (ABS), the brake light may also
indicate reduced braking performance due to the loss of
electronic brake proportioning. If the parking brake is off
and the light remains on, have the brake system inspected as soon as possible.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. This can be done by turning
the ignition switch to START. The light should come on.
If the red brake light does not come on when the ignition
is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the brake
warning light repaired promptly.

117

WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

4
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
The brake warning light will come on if the ABS light is
not functioning and there is an ABS system malfunction.
11. Light Outage Indicator
With the key in the ignition switch turned to
the ON/RUN position, an indicator light
comes on. It should go out when the engine
is running. If the indicator light does not go
out after starting the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, it indicates a failure in the parking light,
taillight, stoplight, low beam headlight, or other exterior lamps.

118

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The indicator light will come on when the exterior light
fails. If a brake light fails, the light outage indicator will
come on when applying the brake and stays on until the
engine is turned off.
NOTE: If additional lighting equipment is installed
(e.g., auxiliary headlights, etc.) be certain to connect into
the fuse before the failure indicator monitoring unit in
order to avoid damaging the system.
12. Antilock Warning Indicator Light
The ABS warning indicator light comes on
with the key in the ignition switch turned to
the ON/RUN position, and should go out
with the engine running.
If the ABS warning indicator light comes on while the
engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected
a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the brake
system functions in the usual manner, but without antilock assistance.
If the ABS light is on, have the system checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

13. Brake Assist Indicator Light
The indicator light for the Brake Assist System (BAS) is combined with the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP). This yellow indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on with the
key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/RUN
position. The BAS/ESP warning indicator light also
comes on when a malfunction is detected in either the
Brake Assist System or the Electronic Stability Program. It should go out with the engine running. If the
BAS/ESP indicator light comes on continuously, see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
14. Seat Belt Indicator Light
With the key in the ignition, the light comes
on, and a warning sounds for a short time if
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the engine, the seat belt indicator light
blinks and a chime sounds periodically for up to 90
seconds to remind the driver and passenger to fasten the
seat belts. Fastening the seat belts will extinguish the
light and silence the chime.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The seat belt indicator light will remain lit until the seat
belts are fastened.
15. Charging System Indicator Light
Should the charging system indicator light
fail to come on prior to starting when the key
is in the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, or should it fail to go out after
starting or during operation, it indicates a malfunction
that must be repaired immediately at an authorized
dealer.
If the charging system indicator light comes on, or a loss
of power steering assistance is noticeable while the
engine is running, this may indicate that the accessory
drive belt has broken. Should this condition occur, the
belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the
vehicle.

119

CAUTION!
The accessory drive belt also drives the water pump.
Operating the vehicle with a failed belt can cause
engine overheating and possible severe engine
damage.

4
16. High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
headlights are in the high beam setting.

To activate the high beams, push the multifunction
control lever past the point of resistance, toward the
instrument panel.
17. Electronic Digital Clock
A digital readout in the instrument cluster shows the
time in hours and minutes whenever the ignition switch
is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
When the ignition switch is in the OFF/LOCK position,
timekeeping is accurately maintained.

120

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The display can be adjusted with the knob/button located to the left of the clock.

• Press the button twice (with the key removed or in
the OFF/LOCK or ACC position).

18. Gear Indicator
For automatic transmission vehicles, the current gear
shift selector range is indicated in the gear range indicator display.

21. Main Odometer, Flexible Service System (FSS)
This shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

19. Push Button for Time Setting
To adjust the time display, turn the key in the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN or ACC position. The knob/
button located just to the left of the clock is used to
change the time. Pull out the knob and turn it to the left
for hour adjustment; pull out the knob and turn it to the
right for minute adjustment.
Time is set 5 seconds after adjusting the minute setting.
20. Trip Odometer, Flexible Service System (FSS)
Indicator
This display shows the distance traveled since last reset.
To reset:
• Press the button to the left of the display once (with
the key in the ON/RUN position).

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct distance that the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after service so that the correct distance can be
determined.
22. Push Button for Activating the Instrument
Cluster, Intensity of Instrument Lights, for Resetting
Trip Odometer and Flexible Service System (FSS)
Indicator
Press the knob/button to illuminate the display. To vary
the intensity of the instrument cluster lights, rotate the
knob/button.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To reset the trip odometer, press the knob/button once
with the key in the ON/RUN position. Press the knob/
button twice with the key removed or in the OFF/LOCK
or ACC position.
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is directly
related to the operating conditions of the vehicle.
There are two symbols which will appear in the
main odometer display field prior to the next
suggested service. This symbol represents Service A.
This second symbol represents Service B.
Depending on operating conditions throughout the year, the next service is calculated and
displayed next to this symbol in days remaining before the next service is required.
Likewise, the next service may be calculated
and displayed next to this symbol as distance
remaining before the next service is required.

121

The counter can also be reset by any individual after the
indicated service has been performed. To do so:
1. Turn key to the ON/RUN position.
2. Within one second press the knob/button twice.
3. The present status for days or distance is displayed. Within 10 seconds turn the key to OFF/
LOCK.
4. Press and hold the knob/button, while turning
the key to ON/RUN again. The present status for
days or distance is displayed once more. Continue
to hold the knob/button.
After approximately 10 seconds, a signal sounds and
the display shows 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km) for
approximately 10 seconds.
5. Release the knob/button.
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have an
authorized dealer correct it.
The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds when turning the key to the ON/RUN position,

122

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

or while driving when reaching the service warning
threshold. It can be canceled manually by pressing the
knob/button.

starts combined with short distance driving in which the
engine does not reach normal operating temperature,
reduce the interval between services.

Once the suggested term has passed, the message plus
either the symbol for Service A or the symbol for
Service B preceded by a – (minus symbol) blinks for
approximately 30 seconds and a signal sounds every
time when turning the key to the ON/RUN position.

However you choose to set your reference numbers, the
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet must
be followed to properly care for your vehicle.

The FSS display can also be called up for approximately 10 seconds with the display illuminated by
pressing the knob/button twice within one second.
Following a completed A or B service your authorized
dealer sets the counter to 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000
km).
NOTE: When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or
more days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any
such days not counted by FSS can be added by your
authorized dealer.
The interval between services is determined by the type
of vehicle operation. Driving at extreme speeds, and cold

23. Outside Temperature Display
The temperature display is located on the left side of the
instrument cluster, below the fuel and engine temperature gauges.
The sensor for the outside temperature indicator is
located in the front fascia area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during
idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of
the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not
by comparison to external displays (e.g., bank signs, etc.).
Adaptation to ambient temperature takes place in steps
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stopand- go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of
temperature change.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to
serve as an ice-warning device and is unsuitable for
that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface
is free of ice.
24. Airbag Light
The operational readiness of the airbag system is verified by the airbag indicator light
in the instrument cluster when turning the
key in the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON/RUN position. If no fault is detected, the light
will go out after approximately 4 seconds. After the
lamp goes out, the system continues to monitor the
components and circuitry of the airbag system and
will indicate a malfunction by coming on again.
The light will come on and remain on for 4 seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If

123

the bulb is not lit during starting, have it replaced. If the
light stays on, or comes on while driving, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!
In the event a malfunction of the airbag is indicated,
the airbag may not be operational. For your safety, we
strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
dealer immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the airbag may not be activated when
needed in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
25. Telescoping Wheel Indicator Light
With the key in the ignition and turned to the
ON/RUN position, the indicator light in the
instrument cluster comes on. It should go
out when the engine is running. If the indicator light does not go out after starting the engine, the
telescoping steering column is not locked properly.

124

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly
locked the steering column.
26. Check Engine Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system that monitors the emissions and engine control systems. If a problem is detected in one of
these systems, the Check Engine light will come on.
The light comes on and stays on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, or
poor fuel quality may illuminate the light after the engine
is started. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time you
refuel.
If the Check Engine light remains on continuously and
the vehicle is driving normally, you may still drive the
vehicle. In most situations, the vehicle will not require

towing. However, we recommend that you have the
system checked at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle is not driving normally, and the Check
Engine light flashes or remains on continuously, it is an
alert to serious conditions that could lead to loss of power
or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should
be serviced at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
27. Brake Wear Indicator Light
With the key in the ignition and turned to the
ON/RUN position, the brake wear indicator
light comes on. The light goes out when the
engine is running.
If the indicator light comes on during braking, this
indicates the brake pads are worn down.
Have the brake system checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

28. Oil Level Indicator Light
With the key in the ignition switch turned to
the ON/RUN position, the oil level indicator
light comes on. It should go out immediately
when the engine is running. If the light does
not go out, or comes on while driving, the engine oil
level has dropped to approximately the minimum
mark on the dipstick.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
A sensor in the oil pan allows oil level to be checked
without opening the hood. It provides an accurate measurement of oil level, whereas the low engine oil level
indicator warns that oil level is definitely too low. With
the vehicle parked on a level surface, the engine is
warmed up and shut off for approximately five minutes.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position, press the knob to the left of the speedometer
once and wait 7 seconds. An ISO oil level icon appears in
the trip odometer window and a “clock” icon in the
cumulative odometer display. Pressing the knob to the
left of the speedometer twice within one second displays
one of the following messages:

125

• OK
• -1.0 Q (-1.0L)
• -1.5 Q (-1.5L)
• -2.0 Q (-2.0L)
• HI
The indicated amount of oil must be added to the engine
if the message -2.0 Q (-2.0L) blinks and a signal sounds.
The HI message indicates that the excess oil must be
removed from the pan to avoid possible engine or
catalytic converter damage. If the ISO oil level icon and
“clock” icon remain on when attempting to check oil
level and no message follows, or if the low engine oil
level warning lamp comes on, a malfunction in the
engine oil level system is indicated. A conveniently
located dipstick allows manual checking of the oil level.
If no leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should be topped to
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.
29. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level drops to about 2 gallons (7.5
liters), this symbol will light and remains lit until
fuel is added.

126

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

“INFINITY MODULUS” AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH SINGLE-DISC CD PLAYER AND GPS
NAVIGATION
(OPTIONAL - See separate User’s Manual)
AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH SINGLE-DISC CD
PLAYER
INFINITY MODULUS Entertainment Systems
A premium Infinity Modulus AM/FM stereo, single-disc
CD audio system is standard equipment on some models. It feeds a six-channel, 240-watt amplifier with dual
subwoofers mounted in the back panel behind the seats,
and four door-mounted speakers. These systems can be
identified by the Infinity brand mark on the radio faceplate.

Power/Volume Control
To activate the audio system, press the ON/OFF knob on
the left. If the unit was switched off using the ignition
switch, it will switch on again with the ignition switch.
Press the ON/OFF knob within three seconds of turning
the ignition switch off to prevent the radio from switching off.
The unit can also be operated without the ignition switch
turned on by pressing the ON/OFF knob, but it will
switch off automatically after one hour.
The volume is controlled by rotating the ON/OFF knob
to the left or right.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Audio (AUD) Settings
• Bass (BASS)
Press the AUD button repeatedly until BASS appears.
Rotate the right rotary control for the desired level
(from -9 to +9).
• Treble (TREB)
Press the AUD button repeatedly until TREB appears.
Rotate the right rotary control for the desired level
(from -9 to +9).
• Balance (BAL)
Press the AUD button repeatedly until BAL appears.
Rotate the right rotary control for the desired level
(from -9 to +9).
• Linear adjustment (LINEAR)
The tone values for the set signal source (e.g., radio/
FM) are set to “0” (mean value). Press and hold the
AUD button for more than 4 seconds until FM LINEAR appears (which affects FM only). Press and hold

127

the AUD button for more than eight seconds until ALL
LINEAR appears (which affects both radio and CD).
• Mute function (MUTE)
To activate the mute function in all modes and wavebands, press the TP button. The mute function is
cancelled by either pressing the TP button again, or by
turning the volume control.
NOTE: After six seconds without any action, or by
pressing OPT, CD, AM, FM, or TP, the current setting is
cancelled, and the new setting is stored.
FM1 – FM2 – FM AS – BEST FM
The system has four FM memory modes that can be
selected by repeatedly pressing the FM button.
FM1 – One of ten memorized FM station frequencies can
be selected by pressing a multifunction button.
FM2 – A second set of ten memorized FM station
frequencies can be selected by pressing a multifunction
button.

128

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

FM AS – An autostore feature will store the 9 current
stations with the strongest signal on station buttons 1-9 in
the order of their signal quality.
Press the FM button repeatedly until FM AS is displayed
to perform an autostore scan. Press the multifunction
button labeled AS repeatedly until AS-SEEK is displayed.
To select the stored stations, press the 1-9 buttons.
BEST FM – The BEST FM function automatically memorizes and continuously updates the frequencies of stations in order of their signal strength.
The strongest station comes up first when BEST FM is
selected. Stations with stronger or weaker signals are
selected by turning the right rotary knob.
To select the displayed station, press the right rotary
control/push button.
Tuning FM stations – Rotating the right rotary control to
the right or left will change the FM frequency to the next
higher or lower station with a strong signal. To manually
step through each frequency or tune in a station with a
weaker signal, press the MAN button first, and then
rotate the rotary control right or left.

Storing FM stations – 10 frequencies can be stored on FM
1 and on FM 2 by pressing a multifunction button for
three seconds; a tone will confirm that the selection was
set.
Scan Search FM (SC) – To activate, press the right rotary
control/push button until SC is displayed.
Beginning with the currently set frequency, the next
station scanned will be heard for eight seconds. Press the
right rotary control/push button if you wish to keep the
current station. Once the scan begins, it will continue
until either a station or program is retained or until
another mode is selected.
Radio Data System (RDS) Stations
PTY (Program Type)
The program type of the selected station can be displayed
for 10 seconds, or scanned in order of ascending frequency for eight seconds each.
To activate, press the OPT button in FM mode, then press
the multifunction PT button. You can pre-select one of the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

currently available PTY by turning the right rotary
control/push button and the program type scan search
begins.
Press the button again to keep the received program. If
the selected station does not transmit a PTY identification, the display will show NO PTY. If all criteria for
evaluating RDS are not met, the unit will only display the
frequency.

129

• R B – R&B
• CLS ROCK – Classic Rock
• SOFT R B – Soft R&B
• ADLT HIT – Adult Hits
• LANGUAGE – Language Program
• SOFT RCK – Soft Rock

The following are examples of program types displayed:

• REL MUSC – Religious Music

• NEWS – News Service

• TOP 40 – Top 40

• SOFT – Soft Music

• REL TALK – Religious Talk

• INFORM – Information Programs

• COUNTRY – Country Music

• NOSTALGA – Nostalgia

• PERSNLTY – Personality

• SPORTS – Sports Reports

• OLDIES – Oldies Format

• JAZZ – Jazz Music

• PUBLIC – Public Radio

• TALK – Talk Programs

• WEATHER – Weather Forecast

• CLASSICL – Classical

• PTY 24-28 – Not Specified

• ROCK – Rock Music

• NO PTY – No Program Type

130

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AM-AM AS
The system has two AM modes available. Press the AM
button repeatedly until the band or operation mode is
selected. To search in this mode, press the right rotary
control/push button and the abbreviation SC is displayed. Receivable stations can be heard for eight seconds. Press the control again to keep the received station.
Once the scan search begins, it will continue until either
a station is retained or until another mode is selected.
Tuning AM stations – Rotating the right rotary control to
the right or left will change the AM frequency to the next
higher or lower station with a strong signal. To manually
step through each frequency or tune in a station with a
weaker signal, press the MAN button first, and then
rotate the rotary control right or left.
Storing AM stations – 10 frequencies can be stored on AM
by pressing a multifunction button for three seconds; a
tone will confirm that the selection was set.
AM AS – An autostore feature will store the 9 current
stations with the strongest signal on station buttons 1-9 in
the order of their signal quality. Press the AM button

repeatedly until AM AS is displayed to perform an
autostore scan. Press the multifunction button labeled AS
repeatedly until AS-SEEK is displayed. To select the
stored stations, press the 1-9 buttons.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
To activate the CD function, press the CD button; CDS is
shown in the display. If no CD disc is present, the display
briefly shows NO CDS and the radio mode remains
active.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!
Before inserting a CD, assure that a CD is not already
in the player. Press the CD button; if the display
shows NO CDS, a new CD can be inserted. If a CD is
already loaded, press and release the EJT button and
allow time for the current CD to be ejected. Loading
a new CD into the player while another CD is already
loaded can result in a jammed mechanism which may
require service at an authorized dealer.
Insert the CD into the slot with the printed side up. The
unit will display the number of tracks and total playback
time. After the last track has been played back, the unit
automatically begins to play the first track again.
To eject a disc, briefly press and release the
EJT button.

If the power is turned off, the disc will remain in the CD
slot for protection.

131

Features of the CD player:
• Skipping Tracks
Turn the right rotary control/push button. Turn further to the left or right to skip multiple tracks. If a track
was played for less than eight seconds, the system will
skip to the next track.
• Scan Tracks (SC)
Push the right rotary control/push button until the
display shows SC. All tracks are played back for eight
seconds each. Press the button again to cancel this
feature.
• Fast Forward/Rewind (<<, >>)
Press and hold the multifunction button >> for audible
fast forward play. Press and hold the multifunction
button << for audible fast rewind play. The relative
time is displayed during this operation and continues
for an additional eight seconds after releasing the
function button.

132

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Relative Time Display (T)
Press the multifunction button T for the time of the
currently playing track to be displayed for approximately eight seconds.
• Random Play (RP)
Press the multifunction button RP for random generation of the next track to be played. Press the button
again to cancel the feature.
NOTE: To protect the unit from excessive heat, a
temperature protection device has been integrated into
the circuitry. When a high operating temperature is
detected, CD TEMP is displayed for eight seconds and
the unit switches back to the last source (AM or FM).
Allow sufficient cool down time and retry.
User Menu
The following functions can be customized to your
personal needs in the user menu:
• USER – User Memory
• M/S – Mono/Stereo Setting

• DRIVER – Left/Right Hand Drive Setting
• PHONE – Telephone Characteristics
To enter the USER menu, press the OPT button for more
than three seconds. USER then appears on the display,
and another user action must be entered within six
seconds or this menu is exited automatically. Your current setting can be cancelled and the selections made will
be saved by pressing either the CD, AM, FM or TP
buttons momentarily.
User Memory (USER – 1, 2, 3)
You can program up to three user memories, which saves
the sound settings, and the last received station when the
unit is switched off. To activate, first enter the user menu.
One of the three users can now be selected by turning the
right rotary/push button. You can also call up the
Mono/Stereo setting by pressing the right rotary/push
button at this time.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Mono/Stereo
In order to suppress reception-related interference, three
different parameters can be set to optimize reception.
To activate, call up the user menu, then press the right
rotary control/push button repeatedly until STEREO,
STO AUTO or MONO is displayed (depending on the
currently selected setting, you may need to turn the knob
also for your selection).
• STO AUTO – Setting for normal operation. The unit
switches from stereo to mono and back, depending on
the reception conditions (for nearly all reception areas,
this is the optimal setting).
• STEREO – Setting for exceptional conditions. The unit
is constantly set for stereo reception (primarily for
private broadcasters in urban areas).
• MONO – Setting for receptions with constant reflection, the unit is constantly set for monaural reception.
You can also call up the Setting DRIVER mode by
pressing the right rotary/push button at this time.

133

Driver – L/R
If a telephone with hands-free operation is installed, the
call is routed through the speaker system. The setting
DRIVER is used to set the appropriate speaker side (left
or right).
To activate, call up the user menu, then press the right
rotary control/push button repeatedly until DRIVER L or
DRIVER R is displayed (depending on the currently
selected setting, you may need to turn the knob also for
your selection). You can also call up the Telephone mute
characteristics mode by pressing the right rotary/push
button at this time.
Telephone mute characteristics
If a telephone with hands-free operation is installed, the
call may be routed through the speaker system. This
eliminates the need for an additional speaker (if the
signal lines are connected to the unit). The following
settings are available:
• PH MUTE – Switching radio to mute.
• AUDIO PH – Telephone call via the car radio.

134

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Call up the user menu, then press the right rotary
control/push button repeatedly until AUDIO PH or PH
MUTE is displayed (depending on the currently selected
setting, you may need to turn the knob also for your
selection).
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO ANTENNA
The radio antenna is located in the rear liftgate glass on
the coupe vehicles and mounted on the left rear body
panel on the roadster vehicles. The antenna requires no
maintenance.

CAUTION!
Window tint films applied to the liftgate glass of
coupe vehicles can significantly degrade radio reception if they contain any metallic content. Before
applying any film to increase occupant privacy or
reduce the heating effect of the sun, make sure that
the film does not contain any metallic substances.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

135

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.

1. Driver Temperature Control

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The climate control system allows you to balance the
temperature, amount and direction of the air circulating
throughout the vehicle.

2. Passenger Temperature Control
3. Fan Speed Control
4. Air Recirculation/REST
5. Air Conditioning ON/OFF
6. Rear Window Defroster
7. Air Distribution (Mode) Control

The system is always at operational readiness, except
when manually switched off. The climate control only
operates with the engine running.
The climate control removes a considerable amount of
moisture from the air during operation in the air conditioning mode, therefore it is considered normal operation
for water to drip on the ground through ducts in the
underbody.

136

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The settings and controls are as follows:
Temperature Control
Use the driver or passenger temperature control to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. The blue area of the control indicates
cooler temperatures, while the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
The temperature selector should be left at the desired
temperature setting so that the system can automatically
reach that selection as quickly as possible. The inside
temperature will not heat or cool any quicker by setting
the selector higher or lower upon initial start up.
Fan Control
Use this control to regulate the amount of air
volume moving through the system in any
mode you select. Turn the control clockwise to
increase fan speed; counterclockwise to decrease fan speed.

Basic Setting - Heater
Select a temperature for each side of the passenger compartment. Select air volume with
the fan control switch and set the fan control at
least to position 2 to prevent windows from
fogging up. Set the air distribution control switch to the
tri-level setting. Turn the defroster outlets for the side
windows to the detent positions. Open center air outlets
as desired.
Select a temperature for each side of the passenger compartment. Select air volume with
the fan control switch. Then select the panel
setting on the air distribution control switch to
force air from the panel outlets.
Select a temperature for each side of the passenger compartment. Select air volume with
the fan control switch. Then select the Bi-Level
setting on the air distribution control switch to
force air from both the upper panel outlets and the floor
outlets.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Basic Setting - Air Conditioner
Press the air conditioning ON/OFF switch. The
light in the switch will illuminate. Select a
temperature for each side of the passenger
compartment. Select the air volume with the
fan control switch, at least to position 1. Set the air
distribution control switch to one of the positions shown
above. Open center air outlets. Open left and right side
air outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not run if
the fan control switch is not set to position 1 or higher.

137

NOTE: The dot between the air distribution control
icons is a mix position between the two modes.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the compressor is on. This is a normal occurrence,
since the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain
comfort and increase fuel economy.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Defrosting
Set the temperature selectors to the maximum
heating position, set the fan control to position 5,
and the air distribution to the defrost position. Close the
center air outlets. Close the left and right side air outlets.
Turn the defroster outlets for the side windows to the
detent position.
Defogging Windows Fogged Up On Inside
Press the A/C button; the indicator light should illuminate. Switch off the air recirculation; the indicator light
should go out. Set the air distribution control switch to
the defrost position. Increase air volume with the fan

138

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

control switch to position 1 or higher. Close the center,
left, and right side air outlets. Turn the defroster outlets
for the side windows to the detent position.
NOTE: The air conditioner removes moisture from the
air inside your vehicle. The quickest and most efficient
method for defogging your windows, even if the air
temperature in your vehicle is cool, is to use the air
conditioner. Make sure that you press the A/C button to
defog your windows.

Windshield Fogged Up On Outside
Switch on the windshield wipers. Set the air distribution
control switch to the defrost position. Increase air volume
with the fan control switch. Close the center and right
side air outlets. Turn the defroster outlets for the side
windows to the detent position.
Ventilation

To receive outside air through the panel outlets, turn off
the Air Conditioning ON/OFF switch. The light in the
switch should be off. Set the controls as above for basic
air conditioning.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

139

Climate Control - OFF
To switch the climate control off, set the air volume
control switch to position 0. The fresh air supply to the
vehicle interior is shut off. While driving, use this setting
only temporarily, otherwise the windshield could fog up.

inside the switch starts blinking. As soon as the battery
has sufficient voltage, the defroster automatically turns
itself back on.

Rear Window Defroster
Turn the key in the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position. To select, press the rear
window defroster button once and release. The
indicator light in the switch should illuminate.
To cancel, press the rear window defroster button again
and release.

To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.
Labels can be peeled off by soaking with warm
water.

NOTE: Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed before activating the defroster. The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the
battery drain to a minimum, turn off the defroster as soon
as the window is clear. The defroster is automatically
turned off after a maximum of 12 minutes of operation.

Air Recirculation/REST
This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the entry of annoying odors or dust into
the vehicle’s interior. Outside air does not flow
into the vehicle’s interior. To select, press the
recirculation button. To cancel, press the recirculation
button again.

If several components in the vehicle are consuming
power simultaneously, or the battery is only partially
charged, it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn itself off. When this happens, the indicator light

The system will automatically switch from recirculated
air to fresh air after approximately five minutes at
outside temperatures below approximately 40°F (5°C);

CAUTION!

140

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

after approximately 30 minutes, at outside temperatures
above approximately 40°F (5°C); after approximately five
minutes, if the A/C button is pressed.
At high outside temperatures, the system automatically
engages the recirculated air mode for approximately 30
minutes, thereby increasing the cooling capacity performance. Press the recirculation button again to extend the
recirculated air mode.
Residual Engine Heat Utilization (REST)
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue heating the interior for a short while.
Air volume is controlled automatically. Select a
temperature for each side of the passenger
compartment. Set the air distribution control switch to
the desired position.
To select, turn the key in the ignition switch to the ACC
or the OFF/LOCK position or remove. Press the recirculation button. The indicator light in the button illuminates. This function selection will not activate if the
battery charge level is insufficient.

To cancel, press the recirculation button. The indicator
light in the button goes out. The system will automatically shut off if you turn the key in the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position, after approximately 30 minutes,
or if the battery voltage drops.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner
system that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected
in a recovery system for recycling.
Dust Filter (If Equipped)
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out before
outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
NOTE: Keep the air intake grille in front of windshield
free of snow and debris.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

141

Operating Tips

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ Park Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

▫ Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below -20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

▫ Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
m Transmission Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Maneuvering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ AutoStickt Gear Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Program Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Emergency Operation (Limp Home Mode) . . . 155
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . 159

144

STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

m Tire Pressure Monitor System (If Equipped) . . 181

▫ ESP Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

▫ Brake Pad Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

m Original Equipment Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 185

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 170

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 171

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

m Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

▫ Roof Luggage Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING!
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that
selector lever is in the NEUTRAL or PARK position
(gearshift lever in Neutral). Turn the key in the ignition
switch to the ON/RUN position. Apply the brakes before
shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
Vehicles with automatic transmissions:
Do not depress the accelerator. Simply turn the key in the
ignition switch clockwise to the START position and

145

release when the engine starts. If the engine will not run,
turn the key counterclockwise to the OFF/LOCK position and repeat the starting procedure. If there are several
unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the
nearest authorized dealer.
Vehicles with manual transmissions:
Do not depress the accelerator. Fully depress the clutch
pedal, otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the
integrated safety interlock. Simply turn the key in the
ignition switch clockwise to the START position and
release when the engine starts. The starter will engage
until the engine is running. If the engine will not run,
turn the key counterclockwise to the OFF/LOCK position and repeat the starting procedure. If there are several
unsuccessful attempts, have the system checked at the
nearest authorized dealer.

146

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Due to the starter non-repeat feature, the key
must be turned completely to the left before attempting
to start the engine again.

If Engine Fails to Start

WARNING!

Extremely Cold Weather (below -20°F or -29°C)
For reliable starting in areas where temperatures frequently drop below -20°F (-29°C), we recommend the use
of an externally powered battery and an electric engine
block heater. Advice on these items and installation is
available at your authorized dealer.

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire, causing
serious personal injury.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the

STARTING AND OPERATING

accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.

147

After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING
Manual Transmission

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should
be repeated.

NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
gear selector placed in REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially on an incline. To place the transmission in REVERSE, lift up on the shifter knob, push it to
the left and pull it back.

148

STARTING AND OPERATING

Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal.

NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission
lubricant has warmed, you may have difficulty shifting.
This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.

Be sure the transmission is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD),
when starting from a stopped position. Damage to the
clutch can result from starting in THIRD.

Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for both fuel economy
and performance, it should be upshifted as shown in the
chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration.

NOTE: If there is a need to restart your engine, you
must recycle your ignition switch to the OFF position
before restarting the engine.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.

Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
steady speeds) will result in increased fuel economy, and
may be used as indicated.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.

MPH
(km/h)

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
15
25
40
45
(24)
(40)
(64)
(72)

5-6
50
(80)

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

149

Automatic Transmission

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition switch, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move
the gearshift lever, which could result in an accident
or serious injury.

5
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have an accident.

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Selector lever position

CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.

• Program mode selector switch
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed

150

STARTING AND OPERATING

The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation and
the road characteristics.
The selector lever is automatically locked while in the
PARK position. To move the selector lever out of the
PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed
before the shift lock will release.
Shift the selector lever to the desired position only when
the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the selector lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
NOTE: After selecting any driving position, wait a
moment to allow the gear to fully engage before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.

WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Stopping
For brief stops, leave the transmission in gear and hold
the vehicle with the brake pedal. For longer stops with
the engine idling, shift into the NEUTRAL or PARK
position and hold the vehicle with the parking brake.
When stopping the vehicle uphill, do not hold it with the
accelerator; use the brake. This avoids unnecessary transmission heat build-up.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Maneuvering
To maneuver in tight areas, control the vehicle speed by
gradually releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and
never abruptly step on the accelerator.

151

NOTE: The key can be removed from the ignition
switch only with the selector lever in the PARK position.
With the key removed, the selector lever is locked in the
PARK position.

To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying
only slight acceleration. Rocking a vehicle free in this
manner may cause the ABS or traction system malfunction indicator light to come on. Turn off the engine and
restart the engine to clear the malfunction indication.
Park Position
The PARK position is to be used when parking the
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped. The PARK
position is not intended to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always use
the parking brake in addition to placing the selector lever
in PARK to secure the vehicle.

With a malfunction in the vehicle’s electrical system, the
selector lever could remain locked in the PARK position.
To unlock the selector lever manually, insert the end of
the multipurpose tool from the glove box (or ball point
pen) into the covered opening below the position “D” of
the shift pattern. While pushing the tool down, move the
selector lever out of the PARK position. After removal of

152

STARTING AND OPERATING

the tool from the opening, the cover will not close fully.
Only after moving the selector lever to the “D+” and
“D-” positions does the cover return to its closed position.

Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive
axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be
moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage in
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
NOTE: Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with selector lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage that is not covered by the Limited
Warranty.
Drive
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

Reverse
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Dependent on the program mode selector switch position
“S” or “W,” the maximum speed in the REVERSE gear is
different. However, it is not possible to change the
program mode while in REVERSE.

AutoStickT Gear selection
The transmission gear can be selected by pressing the
selector lever to the right or the left with the selector lever
in the DRIVE position. The gear currently selected is
indicated in the instrument cluster display. Briefly press
selector lever in the “D-” direction. The transmission will
shift from the current gear to the next lower gear. Shifting

STARTING AND OPERATING

into another gear that allows for quicker acceleration or
to slow the vehicle down is possible. Downshifts can also
be performed.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D-” direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the best gear for acceleration.
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the
selector lever is moved in “D-” direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per minute limit would be exceeded.
Briefly press the selector lever in the “D+” direction. The
transmission will shift from the current gear to the next
higher gear.
Press and hold the selector lever in the “D+” direction.
The transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to gear “D.”

153

WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.

5
NOTE: With transmission in gear “D,” “4,” or “3,”
upshifting from FIRST to SECOND to THIRD gear may
be delayed, depending on vehicle speed and engine
temperature. This allows the catalytic converter to heat
up more quickly to operating temperatures.
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine
temperatures below 95°F (35°C). To prevent the engine
from laboring at low RPM when driving uphill or with
your vehicle heavily loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range.

154

STARTING AND OPERATING

Gear Ranges
“P” PARK
NOTE: If the key is in the ON/RUN position, you must
press the brake pedal to shift out of the PARK position.

Program mode selector switch
The transmission is provided with a selector switch for
Standard “S” and Winter/Wet “W” (snow and ice) program modes.

PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
“R” REVERSE
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” NEUTRAL
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
“D” OVERDRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy.

For standard mode, press the “S” symbol on the switch.
Use this mode for all regular driving. The vehicle starts
out in FIRST gear.
Depressing the accelerator pedal rapidly or nearly to the
floor while driving (kickdown position), rather than
depressing the accelerator pedal in slow, small movements, will cause the automatic transmission to shift

STARTING AND OPERATING

down into a lower gear. Rapid release of the accelerator
pedal will normally result in an upshift. This gear shifting process is dependent on the current vehicle speed.
For Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode, press the “W”
symbol on the switch. The vehicle starts out in SECOND
gear, unless FIRST gear has been selected, or the accelerator pedal is in the kickdown position. The “W” mode
helps to improve traction and driving stability of the
vehicle. The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle
and engine speeds than in the “S” program mode.

155

Emergency Operation (Limp Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a
malfunction of the transmission.
This condition may be accompanied by the CHECK
ENGINE light in the instrument cluster coming on.
In this mode only the SECOND gear or REVERSE gear
can be activated.
To engage SECOND gear or REVERSE:

CAUTION!
Never change the program mode when the selector
lever is out of the PARK position. It could result in a
change of driving characteristics for which you may
not be prepared.

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the selector lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the selector lever to the DRIVE position (for
SECOND gear), or move the selector lever to the REVERSE position (for REVERSE gear).

156

STARTING AND OPERATING

Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
PARKING BRAKE
When you apply the parking brake with engine
running, the brake system warning light in the
instrument cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light, when illuminated with parking brake
application, shows only that the parking brake is on. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE: If the light remains on with the parking brake
released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have
the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. For manual transmission vehicles,
place the gear selector in REVERSE. For vehicles
equipped with automatic transmissions, place the gear
selector in the PARK position.

To release the parking brake, slightly pull up the handle
while pushing the lock button, and guide the lever
downward to its stop. The brake warning light in the
instrument cluster should go out.
A warning sounds if you start to drive without having
released the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, you must set the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK. If you don’t, the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK. As an added

STARTING AND OPERATING

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
an accident.

WARNING!
Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. A
child could be injured, or could injure others, if left
unattended.

157

BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes as standard
equipment. In the event power assist is lost for any
reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function. The effort
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than
that required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the brake warning light during brake use.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. Maximum power boost is applied to the brakes more quickly
in emergency braking conditions. This can help reduce
braking distances relative to what ordinary driving and
braking style might do.

158

STARTING AND OPERATING

The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system you
must apply continuous, full braking power during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
The malfunction indicator light for the BAS is combined
with the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) malfunction
indicator light.

The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on with the key in the ignition switch
turned to the ON/RUN position and should go out with
the engine running. If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light comes on steadily while the engine is running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the BAS or ESP

STARTING AND OPERATING

159

system. As a result, it is possible that only partial engine
output will be available, and pressing the accelerator
pedal will require more effort.
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in
the usual manner, but without BAS.
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP will be
disabled. In this condition, both malfunction indicator
lights come on while the engine is running. If the
malfunction indicator light stays illuminated, have the
BAS and ESP checked at your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces wheelspin under various driving conditions. When ESP is
active, engine torque is limited and the ESP warning light
starts to flash.

5
In winter operation, the effectiveness of the ESP can be
enhanced by equipping the vehicle with DaimlerChrysler
recommended mud and snow (M+S) rated radial-ply
tires and/or snow chains.

160

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

CAUTION!

ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (see
the What To Do In Emergencies section in this
manual), the engine must be shut off (key in the
ignition switch turned to the OFF/LOCK or ACC
position). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.

The ESP warning light starts to flash at any vehicle speed
as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to
spin.
If the ESP warning light flashes during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. While driving, adapt your speed to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE: When the ESP warning light is illuminated
continuously, the ESP is switched off. Adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE: Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not
covered by the DaimlerChrysler Limited Warranty.
NOTE: If the ESP warning light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator.
NOTE: ESP should not be switched off during normal
driving. Disabling of the system under normal operating
conditions will eliminate the benefits of the ESP system.

STARTING AND OPERATING

161

ESP Control switch
The ESP control switch is located in the center console.
When the ESP is switched off, the warning light in the
instrument cluster comes on. When the ESP is switched
on, the warning light goes out.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Rotate the steering wheel to the center position.
3. Rotate the steering wheel completely to the left, and
then rotate the steering wheel completely to the right.
4. Bring the steering wheel back to the center position.
5. The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light will go out.
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator light is still illuminated, the vehicle should be serviced at an authorized
dealer.

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel,
switch off the ESP by pressing the upper half of the ESP
switch. The ESP warning light will then be continuously

162

STARTING AND OPERATING

illuminated. With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.

CAUTION!
Snow chains should never be used without the
recommended mud and snow (M+S) rated radial-ply
tires. Damage to your vehicle may result from such
usage.
ESP always operates under braking, even with the switch
in the OFF position.
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the
ESP system will apply the brake at the affected wheel
until the wheel regains sufficient traction. The traction
control engages at approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and
switches off at 50 mph (80 km/h).
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP,
press the lower half of the switch (the ESP warning light
goes out).

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up. The system operates
to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on
slippery surfaces.
NOTE: The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking maneuvers.
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
independent of road surface conditions.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal
while experiencing the pulsation. Continuous, steady
brake pedal pressure results in optimal braking power
while maintaining the ability to steer the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING

In the case of an emergency brake maneuver, keep
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this
manner only can the ABS be most effective.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even
with light brake pedal pressure because of the increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.

WARNING!
Significant over- or under-inflation of tires, or mixing sizes of front or rear tires or wheels on the vehicle
can reduce braking effectiveness. Maintain proper
tire pressure and always use the tires and wheels
specified in this manual for your vehicle.

163

The anti-lock brake system conducts a low-speed self-test
at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly
on the brake while this test is occurring, you may feel
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow. The anti-lock brake system
pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal.

WARNING!
Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the effectiveness of the anti-lock brakes and may lead to an
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance
longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when
you need to slow down or stop.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard.
This is normal, indicating that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning.

164

STARTING AND OPERATING

The ABS malfunction indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on with the key in the ignition switch
turned to the ON/RUN position, and should go out with
the engine running. If the ABS light does not illuminate
briefly during this procedure, or remains on after the
engine is running, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

When the ABS malfunction indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on while the engine is running, it
indicates that the ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. In this case, the brake system functions in
the usual manner, but without antilock assistance. With
the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lights come on
with the engine running. If the charging voltage falls
below 10 volts, the malfunction indicator light comes on
and the ABS is switched off. When the voltage is above
this value again, the malfunction indicator light should
go out and the ABS is operational. If the malfunction
indicator light stays illuminated, have the system
checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING AND OPERATING

165

WARNING!

ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABSequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.

To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on
the pedal. This could overheat the brakes and
result in unpredictable braking action, longer
stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of
water can build up between the tire tread and the
road. This hydroplaning action can cause loss of
traction, braking ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.

166

STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake Pad Break-In
The brakes on your vehicle do not require a long break-in
period, but avoid repeated hard brake applications from
high speeds during initial break-in. Also avoid severe
brake loading such as may be encountered when descending long mountain grades.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short period of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolong operation of the steering system at the end of
the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings

167

NOTE: European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this
tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE: LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Tire Sizing Chart
NOTE: P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.

NOTE: Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
NOTE: High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

168

STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(...blank...( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING

169

Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load
index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified
operating conditions. i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and posted speed limits.)
Load Identification:
(...blank...( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.

170

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

171

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Tire Placard Location
NOTE: Some vehicles have a “Tire and Loading Information” placard located on the driver’s side “B” pillar.

This placard tells you important information about:
1. the number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2. the total weight your vehicle can carry
3. the tire size designed for your vehicle
4. the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear and
spare tires.

172

STARTING AND OPERATING

Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” or “Vehicle Capacity” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable)
should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” or
“Vehicle Capacity” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

STARTING AND OPERATING

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5 x 15) =
650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

173

manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).

174

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Overloading of your tire is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle-never
overload them.

TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Please take time to read the tire warranty booklet in your
Owner’s Manual package. It contains valuable information on tire maintenance.
Specific recommendations on guidelines for long—term
tire storage should be requested of the tire manufacturer.
Please refer to the tire warranty booklet for contact
information.
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

175

1. Safety—

WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

176

STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar.

Tire Placard Orientation tread act

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.

177

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.

178

STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.

WARNING!

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35
mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.

179

Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

180

STARTING AND OPERATING

Recommended Tire Inflation Pressures

WARNING!

Sport Performance (Y speed rating) tires and All-Season
Performance (W speed rating) tires
Front 225/40 ZR18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 psi (221 kPa)
Rear 255/35 ZR19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 psi (227 kPa)

• When obtaining replacement tires, assure that the
tires are specified for replacement on the Crossfire.
Tires with the same size, speed, or load ratings that
are specified for replacement on other vehicles may
not properly fit on the original equipment wheels of
your vehicle.

Sport Performance (Y speed rating) tires and All-Season
Performance (W speed rating) tires above 100 mph (161
km/h)
Front 225/40 ZR18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 psi (248 kPa)
Rear 255/35 ZR19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 psi (248 kPa)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

Winter tires
Front 225/40 VR18 M+S . . . . . . . . . . . 33 psi (227 kPa)
Rear 225/40 VR18 M+S. . . . . . . . . . . . 36 psi (248 kPa)

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. Check with your authorized dealer before replacing tires with a different size.
Alignment And Balance
The suspension components of your vehicle should be
inspected and aligned when needed to obtain full tire
tread mileage
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.

181

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to a computer which monitors for low pressure.
If low pressure is measured, the TPMS Telltale Lamp will
illuminate.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS informs you of a low tire pressure condition.
If this occurs, correct your tire inflation pressure as soon
as possible, and inspect all of your tires. Be sure to use a
high quality gauge when adjusting pressure. The TPMS
is designed to periodically monitor your tire pressure but

182

STARTING AND OPERATING

cannot be expected to function as a tire pressure gauge.
There can be a delay between the instant you adjust the
air pressure in a tire and when the system updates the
display. The TPMS is not intended to provide you with
notification of rapid air loss.

The TPMS will cause the Telltale lamp in the instrument
cluster to illuminate whenever the pressure in one tire
falls 25% below the recommended pressure shown on the
tire label.

NOTE: A TPMS does not replace normal tire maintenance.

CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equipment that
is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use
aftermarket tire sealant or balance beads as damage
to the sensors may result. The standard TIREFIT
system (see Tirefit Tire Repair and Jacking Instructions in the What To Do In Emergencies section) is
specifically designed to operate in conjunction with
the TPMS, and will not damage the sensors.

STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The pressure in your tires changes with temperature. A significant decrease in temperature could
reduce cold inflation pressure below the TPMS setpoint.
For example, tires inflated to the proper cold inflation
pressure on a warm day or in a warm garage could
illuminate the TPMS Telltale lamp on the following day if
the temperature is very cold. ALWAYS check the pressure
in your tires if the TPMS Telltale lamp is illuminated.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123

183

TIRE CHAINS
The RUD-matict DISC is the only tire chain system
approved for use on the Chrysler Crossfire.
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels and only
with the recommended winter mud and snow (M+S)
tires and wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting
instructions.
Tire chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads
at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Remove
chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without
snow.
When driving with tire chains, press the ESP control
switch to OFF.

CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if unapproved tire
chains are used.

184

STARTING AND OPERATING

ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRES
Your vehicle is equipped with either sport performance
tires or all-season performance tires. The sport performance tires offer the maximum road handling capability
in dry and wet weather conditions. The all-season performance tires, while offering slightly less road handling
capability, are able to provide traction capability in snow
and ice conditions. Both types of tires are rated for high
speed operation. It is important that you know what type
of tires your vehicle is equipped with so that you
understand their traction and handling characteristics for
various road conditions. Replacement tires should be of
the same size and speed rating to continue to provide the
same level of performance you are accustomed to.

SNOW TIRES
Some countries or regions require the use of snow tires
during winter. See the recommended snow type winter
tire applications in this section.

WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with sport performance tires that are optimized for driving in dry and
wet weather conditions. However, these tires have
reduced traction capability in snow and ice. When
driving your Crossfire in these conditions with these
tires, you must take special care to maintain control
and avoid accidents. We recommend that you equip
your vehicle with “SNOW” or “ALL SEASON” tires
on all four wheels for driving in snowy and icy
conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING

185

If you need snow tires, the recommended size for the
front and rear tires is the same size as the original
equipment front tires. This size tire on the rear allows the
use of tire chains on the rear wheels. Selection of this size
tire also requires the purchase of two additional wheels
with the same size specification as the original equipment front wheels.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.

Snow tires may have a lower speed rating than factory
equipped tires and may not match the maximum vehicle
speed.

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

Snow tires should not be operated at sustained speeds
over 75 mph (120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.

186

STARTING AND OPERATING

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and optimum performance
when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane rating of 91 or
higher. DaimlerChrysler Corporation requires the use of 91 octane or higher premium fuel to
minimize the potential for engine damage.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and should be reported to
your authorized dealer immediately. Engine damage
resulting from operating with a heavy spark knock may
not be covered by the new vehicle warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and stumble. If you experience these
problems, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING

Over 60 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle.
DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends the use of
gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning fuel, referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specially blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve
air quality.
DaimlerChrysler Corporation supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability
of engine and fuel system components.

187

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with materials called oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and
ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the
country during the winter months to reduce carbon
monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems and may damage critical fuel system
components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of DaimlerChrysler
Corporation and may not be covered by the Limited
Warranty. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

188

STARTING AND OPERATING

MMT in Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since
the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or
not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in both Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
In Canada, MMT can be used at levels higher than those
allowed in the United States. For this reason, it is even
more important to look for gasolines without MMT in
Canada.

Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Sulfur in Gasoline
If you live in the Northeast United States, your vehicle
may have been designed to meet California low emission
standards with cleaner burning California reformulated
gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in
states adopting California emission standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting Federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be adversely affected.
Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have
higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of
the vehicle’s catalytic converter. This may cause the
CHECK ENGINE light to illuminate. DaimlerChrysler
Corporation recommends that you try a different brand

STARTING AND OPERATING

of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if
the problem is fuel-related prior to returning your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service.

CAUTION!
If the CHECK ENGINE Light is flashing, immediate
service is required. See the Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBDII) paragraph in the Maintaining Your
Vehicle section of this manual.

ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located under the fuel filler door, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. To open the door, be sure it
is unlocked, then gently press the rear edge of the door
until a click can be heard, then release. The door rear edge
will spring open enough to grasp and pull it completely
open. If the central locking system does not release the fuel
filler door, see your authorized dealer for service. If the gas
cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap has
been designed for use with this vehicle.

189

CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper gas cap. A
poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel
system. The CHECK ENGINE light will come on if
the gas cap is not properly secured.
NOTE: The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door
about 2 inches (50 mm) down from the opening. If fuel is
poured from a portable container, the container should
have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open the
restricting door.

CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.

190

STARTING AND OPERATING

With the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON/
RUN position, the fuel reserve warning light comes on. It
should go out immediately when the engine is running.
If the warning light does not go out after starting the
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of approximately 2 gallons (7.5 liters).
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can
cause the CHECK ENGINE light to illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a single click. This
is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
The CHECK ENGINE light will come on if the gas cap
is not properly secured. Make sure that the gas cap is
tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground outside the vehicle while filling.

STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is in the
following chart and on the tire pressure label attached to
the driver door pillar.
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Cargo Capacity (with two persons) . . . . 115 lbs (52 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 lbs (188 kg)

191

Roof Luggage Rack
Convertible Top Vehicles

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the convertible top, DO NOT
carry any loads on the convertible top.
Coupe Vehicles
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
roof luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity. The maximum recommended roof load for your
vehicle is 110 lbs. (50 kg).

192

STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof luggage rack
which may come in contact with the roof panel.
The load should be secured and placed on top of
the rack, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary
to place some part of the load on the roof, place a
blanket or some other protection between the load
and the roof surface.

Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
luggage rack “Cautions” when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.

• To avoid damage to the roof luggage rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the rated load capacity of
your roof luggage rack system maximum load
capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.

TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with your Crossfire is not recommended.

• Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
carefully secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
luggage rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

m If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

m TIREFIT Tire Repair And Jacking . . . . . . . . . . 195

m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

▫ TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

▫ Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

▫ Tow-Away Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

▫ Jack Location And Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

m Convertible Top Emergency Operation . . . . . . 211

m Jump-Starting The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

▫ Relieving Hydraulic Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

▫ Opening a Locked Decklid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

194

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The flasher switch is located in the console. Push in
the flasher switch and all front and rear directional
signals will flash. Press the flasher switch a second
time to turn the flashers off.

NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may run down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red
area on the gauge.
The engine should not be operated with the coolant
temperature in the red area. Doing so may cause serious
damage which is not covered by the DaimlerChrysler
Limited Warranty.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.

• On the highways – Slow down and use the highest
gear possible.
• In city traffic – While stopped, put the transmission in
Neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• In city traffic – While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this
heat. You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and the fan control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
cooling system.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.

195

WARNING!
A hot cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. If
your temperature gauge pointer is in the red area,
turn off the engine immediately. You may want to call
an authorized dealer for service. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual.
Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

6
TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR AND JACKING
TIREFIT
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).

196

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!
Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in.
(4 mm), tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a
damaged wheel can pose a hazard while driving.
TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances.
Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.
Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance.

1. TIREFIT sealant bottle
2. Air pump flap
3. Recess in air pump
4. Power plug and cable
5. Air pump hose with pressure gauge
6. Hose connection on sealant bottle

Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT
is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or absorbed
through the skin: It causes skin, eye and respiratory
irritation. Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water. If clothing
comes in contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as
soon as possible.
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of
children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Keep away from open flame or heat source.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Sealing tire with TIREFIT
1. Set the parking brake and turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
2. Move the transmission selector lever to the PARK
position (manual transmission to FIRST or REVERSE
gear) and turn off the engine.
3. Remove the TIREFIT kit and electric air pump from
the area below the cargo compartment carpet.
4. Open flap (2) on the electric air pump.
5. Pull the power plug (4) and air hose (5) along with the
pressure gauge out of the air pump housing.
6. Screw the air hose (5) onto the hose connection on the
TIREFIT sealant bottle (1).
7. Holding the sealant bottle by the top, insert it downwards into the recess (3) on the air pump.
8. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated
tire.
9. Screw the filler hose from the sealant bottle on the tire
valve.

197

10. Insert the power plug (4) into the power point on the
instrument panel.
11. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position.
12. Press the switch on the air pump to 1. The air pump
should start to inflate the tire.
13. After five minutes, the tire should be inflated to at
least 26 psi (180 kPa) on the pressure gauge.
14. If the tire doesn’t inflate to this level, press the air
pump switch to 0, disconnect the TIREFIT system from
the tire, and drive the vehicle back and forth approximately 30 feet (9 m) to distribute the sealant more evenly
within the tire.
15. Attach the air pump hose directly to the tire, press the
switch to 1, and inflate the tire again. NOTE: If a tire
pressure of 26 psi (180 kPa) is not reached after five
minutes, the tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further, and call for assistance.

198

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

16. If a tire pressure of 26 psi (180 kPa) is obtained, press
the air pump switch to 0, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF/LOCK position, and disconnect the TIREFIT system.
17. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to ensure
optimum distribution of the tire sealant within the tire.
18. Check the pressure in the tire. If the pressure is above
19 psi (130 kPa), inflate the tire to the pressure indicated
on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar.
19. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at
an authorized dealer or tire service center.
NOTE: Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire
has been inspected.
NOTE: If a pressure of at least 19 psi (130 kPa) cannot
be maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further, and call for
assistance.
NOTE: Do not operate the electric air pump for more
than eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump
may be used again once it has cooled down.

NOTE: Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle once every
four years to assure optimum operation of the system.
NOTE: If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp
cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and
wheel components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has
dried, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
Preparations for Jacking

WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
facility where it can be raised on a lift.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

199

WARNING!
Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or repairing a tire.
Jacking the vehicle should only be necessary in the event
that a tire has been severely damaged, and must be
replaced. (See TIREFIT Tire Repair section for a description of cuts and punctures that may be repairable with
TIREFIT.)

6
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers and park the
vehicle on a firm, level surface; avoid ice or slippery
areas.
• Firmly set the parking brake and shift the transmission
selector lever into PARK (manual transmission to
FIRST or REVERSE gear).
• Turn off the engine.

200

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.

• Passengers must not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is jacked.
NOTE: The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the specified jack location points built
beneath either side of the vehicle.

Jack Location and Instructions

1. Remove the jack and jack handle from stowage beneath the cargo compartment carpet.
2. The lifting points for the jack are located beneath the
outer edge of the body side, directly behind the front
wheel housings, and in front of the rear wheel housings.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

201

202

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged, as shown.

5. Lower the vehicle by cranking the handle counterclockwise, then remove the jack assembly.
NOTE: Before storing the jack, it should be fully
collapsed.
6. Ensure proper tire pressure.

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to make the necessary repair.
3. Holding the jack, insert the cradle under the lifting
points. Crank the handle clockwise until the jack base
meets the ground. Place the jack on firm ground. Position
the jack so that it is always level, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
4. Replace the tire.

WARNING!
A loose jack or tool thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and tools in the
places provided.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JUMP-STARTING THE BATTERY

WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start any time the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.

CAUTION!
Do not try to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Your vehicle cannot be started this way.
Pushing with another vehicle may damage the transmission or the rear of your vehicle. If your vehicle
has a discharged (dead) battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow the procedure carefully.

203

WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t
lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the
clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with
large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas that is flammable
and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the
vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or any other
booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.

204

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach but
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the transmission in Neutral and turn the ignition
OFF for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
jump-start attachment of the booster battery. Connect the
other end of the same cable to the positive jump-start
attachment of the discharged battery.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative jumpstart attachment of the booster battery and then to the
engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make
sure you have good contact on the engine.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fans.
NOTE: If engine does not run after several unsuccessful
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized dealer.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
have an accident. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, rain, mud, loose sand, etc.).

205

Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

206

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
In order to free a stuck vehicle you must turn off the
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
NOTE: ESP should be turned on again after freeing the
vehicle from a stuck condition.

CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission/axle overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using flat
bed equipment. This method is preferable to other types
of towing.

CAUTION!
Important! If towing the vehicle, please note the
following: With the automatic central locking activated and the key in the ignition switch turned to the
ON/RUN position, the vehicle doors lock if the left
front wheel and the right rear wheel are turning at
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
If the vehicle is towed with the front wheels raised,
the engine must be shut off (key in the ignition
switch turned to the OFF/LOCK or ACC positions).
Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and
will apply the rear wheel brakes. Switch off the
tow-away alarm as well as the automatic central
locking system.
Towing restrictions for vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground and the transmission selector lever in the Neutral
position for distances up to 30 miles (48 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). The key must be
turned to the ON/RUN position in the ignition. To be
certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing
beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.

207

Always comply with applicable state or local towing
ordinances.

CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.

208

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Towing Eyes
The vehicle is equipped with front and rear towing eyes
to allow towing with the wheels on the ground or to
allow the vehicle to be easily drawn up on a flatbed tow
truck. The rear towing eye is located on the right side of
the vehicle below the rear fascia. The front hook is
located behind the lower grille in the fascia. For access, a
snap-in grille must be removed using the multifunction
tool from the glovebox.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

209

6
Insert the tool (or similar sized screwdriver) into the slot
in the grille as shown (the tool must be inserted far
enough to engage the clip on the left side of the grille).
Push the tool to the left to disengage the clip and detach
the grille. The front towing eye is now accessible.

210

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Tow-Away Alarm
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior
vehicle lights will flash and an alarm will sound when
anyone attempts to raise the vehicle for towing. The
alarm will last approximately three minutes in the form
of flashing exterior lights. At the same time, an alarm will
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if the
vehicle is immediately lowered. To cancel the alarm,
insert the key in the ignition switch or press the transmit
button on the key fob.

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, press
the tow-away alarm switch to turn off the tow-away
alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a
surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train.
To do so, turn the key in the ignition switch to the
OFF/LOCK or ACC positions, or remove key from the
ignition switch. Press the upper half of the tow-away
alarm switch. The indicator light will illuminate briefly.
Then, exit the vehicle and lock with a key or the remote
control. The tow-away alarm remains switched off until
the vehicle is locked again with a key or the remote
control, at which time it is automatically reactivated.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

211

CONVERTIBLE TOP EMERGENCY OPERATION
If the convertible top cannot be closed using the convertible top switch, check the following:
• Is the decklid closed properly?
• Is there sufficient battery voltage? Start the engine if
necessary.
• Is the rear cargo compartment divider secured in the
vertical position?
If the power convertible top operation does not function
properly, you can close the convertible top manually.
NOTE: The multifunction tool from the glovebox is
required for this job.

6
CAUTION!
Manually closing the convertible top is a complicated
and technically demanding procedure. Closing the
convertible top manually should be performed with
great care by two people. Close the convertible top
manually in emergency cases only. Otherwise, visit
an authorized DaimlerChrysler Dealer.

212

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Relieving Hydraulic Pressure
NOTE: The hydraulic pressure must be relieved before
the top can manually be raised or lowered.
1. Turn the ignition to the “ON” position.

CAUTION!
Ensure that the decklid is closed while raising the
convertible top manually to prevent the possibility of
contact between the decklid and the tonneau cover.

2. Push down on the convertible top switch and hold in
that position.
3. Turn the ignition “OFF” and continue to push down
on the switch for 5 seconds.
4. After 5 seconds the hydraulic system pressure will be
relieved.

WARNING!
It is important that a second person assist you to close
the convertible top manually to prevent injuries.
1. Lower the windows and open the doors.
2. Turn the ignition key off.

WARNING!
Do not place your hands near the convertible top
frame, upper windshield area, or the convertible top
storage compartment while the convertible top is
being raised and locked. Serious personal injury may
occur.
3. Unlock the storage compartment by placing the tool
on the bolt between the backrest and the tonneau cover.
Turn the wrench in the direction of the arrow to its stop
and remove the tool.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

213

6
4. Open the tonneau cover and secure it in the upright
position.
5. Pull up hard on the upper section of the convertible
top to move it out of its storage compartment.

NOTE: Do not let go of the convertible top as it may fall
back into the convertible top storage compartment.

214

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Move the convertible top toward the windshield
header.

8. Place the rear window section of the convertible top in
its vertical position.
9. Close the tonneau cover by placing hands near the
edges (arrows) and slowly lowering it. The tonneau cover
must lock in the first notch of the compartment cover
catch.

WARNING!
Do not place your hands in the convertible top frame
areas. Serious personal injury may occur.
7. Do not place the convertible top frame onto windshield header.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

10. Lock the convertible top storage compartment by
placing the tool on the bolt between the backrest and the
tonneau cover. Turn the wrench in the direction of the
arrow to its stop and remove the tool.

215

11. Lower the rear window section of the convertible top
down and lock into the tonneau cover.

6
12. Fold down the locking latch handle.

216

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

13. Turn the latch handle just past one quarter turn
clockwise and pull the convertible top frame carefully
down until it meets the windshield header attachment
points.

15. Fold the latch handle up.
The convertible top is now locked onto the windshield
header.
14. Turn the latch handle counterclockwise to the stop in
order to lock the convertible top.

NOTE: Have the convertible top operation checked at
your authorized DaimlerChrysler Dealer as soon as possible.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

217

Opening a Locked Decklid
It is possible for the decklid to become locked if a
convertible top system malfunction occurs. If the top is
manually moved to the full up or full down position
when the hydraulic pressure is relieved, the decklid
should unlock.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 3.2L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

▫ Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

m Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . 222

▫ Chassis Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Ignition Wiring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Air Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 236
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 241
▫ Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

220

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

▫ Front Turn Signal And Parking/Standing
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

m Convertible Top Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

▫ Front And Rear Sidemarker Lights . . . . . . . . . 261

▫ Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

▫ Tail, Stop, Back Up And Turn Signal Lights . . . 261

▫ General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

▫ License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

▫ Weather Strip Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

▫ Headlight Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

m Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

▫ Underhood Accessory Fuse Block Fuses . . . . . 253

m Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

▫ Relay Control Module Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

m Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

m Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

m Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Interior Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Exterior Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
m Exterior Light Bulb Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

221

3.2L ENGINE

222

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your Crossfire is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emissions and
engine control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the CHECK ENGINE Light. It will also store
diagnostic codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the CHECK ENGINE light
on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and
drivability. The vehicle must be serviced before any
state emissions tests can be performed.
If the CHECK ENGINE light is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the CHECK
ENGINE light may come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time you add fuel. Tighten the cap until
you hear it “click” once.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies
the following: the CHECK ENGINE Light is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD (Onboard Diagnostic) system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.

223

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON/RUN
position, you will see your CHECK ENGINE light come
on as part of a normal bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The CHECK ENGINE light will flash for about 10
seconds and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn off the ignition key or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
b. The CHECK ENGINE light will not flash at all
and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.

224

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty offered
by DaimlerChrysler Corporation.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the CHECK ENGINE light is
illuminated during normal vehicle operation, you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M
station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
CHECK ENGINE light is on with the engine running.

DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your Crossfire.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
technician.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the maintenance service
recommended by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.

225

However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
You can check the oil level using the procedure described
in Checking Engine Oil Level in the Understanding Your
Instrument Panel section, or by checking the engine oil
dipstick.

226

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1 quart of oil when the reading is at the
MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on this engine.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Change Engine Oil
The oil change interval for your Crossfire is initially set at
7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km).
The Flexible Service System (FSS) in your vehicle evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine
speed, distance driven, and the time elapsed since your
last service. It determines when your vehicle needs
maintenance service and alerts you in advance. The next
necessary service is indicated by the FSS in your instrument cluster.
NOTE: Also see the FSS system details in the Understanding Your Instrument Panel section of this manual.
Very light duty driving cycles (most trips more than 10
miles [16 km] at moderate speeds in moderate temperature conditions) can extend the service interval beyond
7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km).
If ANY of the following apply to your driving, the oil
change interval can be reduced significantly:
• Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C)
• Stop-and-go driving

227

• Extensive engine idling
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km)
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C)
• Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service)
Observe the oil change interval indicated by your FSS
system. This system will monitor the driving conditions
seen by your vehicle, and will recommend the best
interval for servicing your vehicle to maintain it in top
condition.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.

228

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, only use synthetic engine
oils, approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5, such as Mobil 1
SAE 0W-40. The FSS may not alert for an oil change at the
proper interval if an unapproved engine oil is used;
engine damage and reduced engine life may result.

Materials Added To Engine Oils
Do not add materials (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines have a fullflow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopart Engine Oil Filters
are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Drive Belts - Check Condition and Tension
At the distance shown in the maintenance schedules,
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is required, adjust the belts according to the specifications
and procedures shown in the Service Manual.
Special tools are required to properly measure tension
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the distance specified in the appropriate maintenance chart. The entire set should be replaced if there is
any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug. Check the
specifications section for the proper type of spark plug
for use in your vehicle.

229

Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
each interval called out by FSS.

WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. See your
authorized dealer for service.

230

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly serviced to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
If the CHECK ENGINE light is flashing, immediate
service is required.

CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.

WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to DaimlerChrysler Corporation’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for a prolonged period.

231

Ignition Wiring System
The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits.
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.

232

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.

It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.

If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result.
Air Conditioner
Check the air conditioning system at the start of the
warm weather season.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with
a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and
through the condenser as required. Fabric front fascia
protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing
air conditioning performance.

233

Power Steering Fluid
No power steering fluid service is required. The system is
filled at the factory with Pentosin CHF 11S. Steering noise
and reduced component life may result if an unapproved
fluid is used.

WARNING!
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced repair person.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere. The DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that air conditioning service be done by
facilities using refrigerant recycling and recovery equipment that meets SAE standard J1991.

During scheduled maintenance, check the power steering
fluid level at the power steering fluid reservoir. Normally, it will not be necessary to add power steering
fluid.

234

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Before removing the reservoir cap, wipe the outside of
the cap and reservoir so that no dirt can fall into the
reservoir.
The power steering pump has a dipstick. Fluid level
should be maintained at the proper level indicated on the
dipstick. If the indicated level of power steering fluid is
low, see your authorized dealer. With a clean cloth, wipe
any spilled fluid from all surfaces.

Chassis Lubrication
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints whenever under-vehicle service is done.
Steering Linkage
Inspect tie rod ends whenever the vehicle is serviced.
They are permanently lubricated and do not require
periodic lubrication.
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
Your vehicle has four constant velocity universal joints.
Periodic lubrication of these joints is not required. However, the joint boots should be inspected for external
leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.
If leakage or damage is evident, replace the universal
joint boot and grease immediately.
Continued operation could result in failure of the universal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, and rear liftgate / decklid hinges,
should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear.
Hood Latch
When performing other under hood services, the hood
latch release mechanism and safety catch should be
inspected, cleaned, and lubricated.
It is important to maintain proper lubrication to insure
that the hood mechanisms work properly and safely.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, NLGI Grade 2, should be applied sparingly to all pivot and sliding contact areas.
Driver’s Door Lock Cylinder
The driver’s door lock cylinder should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a
small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopart
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder
(avoid excess lubricant).
Insert the key into the lock cylinder and rotate from the
unlocked to the locked position without adding more

235

lubricant. Repeat this procedure three or four times. Wipe
all the lubricant off the key with a clean cloth, to avoid
soiling clothing.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner, or use the washer solvent.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road film and
help reduce streaking, chatter, and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.

236

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Rotate the blade 45 degrees to gain access to the
release tab.
3. Push the release tab as shown in the illustration and
slide the wiper blade assembly down along the arm.
Gently place the wiper arm on the windshield.

4. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.

Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) rated not to
freeze at -25°F (-31°C). Operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.

237

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide which is colorless and odorless. Breathing
it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. Follow the above precautions to keep
your exhaust system as safe as possible.

238

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System

WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
key is in the ON position.

Check the front of the radiator and condenser for an
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. Clean the radiator and
condenser by gently spraying water from a garden hose
at the back of the radiator core.
Check the recovery bottle tank tubing for condition and
tightness of connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect
the entire system for leaks.

• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check coolant protection every 12 months (before the
onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.

Cooling System - Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable
amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable
cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to
remove all deposits and chemicals.
Engine Coolant Disposal
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals or
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only coolant approved to MB 325.0, such as Valvoline
GO5, or an equivalent extended life coolant. Refer to the
recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
correct coolant type.

239

CAUTION!
Failure to use the proper antifreeze could cause
radiator plugging and engine overheating. Do not
mix antifreeze brands or types. Do not use plain
water alone or alcohol base antifreeze products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator
coolant and may plug the radiator.
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and water should be used.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water, such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/antifreeze solution. The
use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

240

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Mixing coolant types other than Mopart products will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will
require more frequent coolant changes.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing,
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant reserve tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN WHEN HOT”
near the cooling system reservoir cap are a safety
precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build
up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.

WARNING!
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulation on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot water to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the system.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the
engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
• Maintain a coolant concentration of a minimum of 50%
ethylene glycol Extended Life Coolant and high quality water with recommended antifreeze for proper
corrosion protection of your engine cooling system
that contains aluminum components.

241

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant bottle hoses
are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle has
air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean,
also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor fuel
economy, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions,
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.

242

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed. Inspect all hose connections such as clamps
and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks
are present. Components should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of degradation that could
cause failure.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Maintenance section.

WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake and Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular
attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

243

NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change.

WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use brake fluid approved to MB 331.0, or a DOT 4 brake
fluid with: minimum dry boiling point (ERBP) 500°F,
minimum wet boiling point (WERBP) 356°F, maximum
viscosity 1500 mm 2/s, conforming to FMVSS 116 and
ISO 4925.

244

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged
braking. You could have an accident.

WARNING!
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter. Use of contaminated fluid may result in reduced
brake performance or a sudden brake failure. You
could have an accident.

CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid as seal damage will result!

Automatic Transmission
The fluid in the automatic transmission should be
changed at 80,000 miles (129,000 km), along with the
transmission fluid filter. After that, the transmission fluid
is filled for life.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only ATF approved to MB 236.10, MB 236.12.
Synthetic Dexron IIIt Automatic Transmission Fluid may
be substituted. Refer to the Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts section for the correct fluid type.
It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained
at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the fluid recommended by DaimlerChrysler Corporation may
cause deterioration in transmission shift quality
and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the
DaimlerChrysler Corporation will result in more
frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to the Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
section for correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is
omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.

245

Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed at 80,000 miles (129,000 km). The fluid is then
filled for life.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Schedules.
Manual Transmission
Selection of Lubricant
No fluid service is required. Use only fluid approved to
MB 236.2. SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting API SL or GF-3,
may be substituted. Refer to the Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants and Genuine Parts section for the correct fluid
type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.

246

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transmission after checking or
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is seated properly.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operation conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.
Special Additives
Do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to

aid in detecting fluid leaks. The use of transmission
sealers should be avoided as this may adversely affect
seals.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body protection requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons,
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.

CAUTION!

• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

247

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.

• Bird droppings.
Washing

Special Care

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.

• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and rear liftgate / decklid
be kept clear and open.

• Use Mopart auto polish to remove road film and
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to
scratch the paint.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.

248

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Use Mopart touch-up paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.

maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash
them with the same soap solution as the body of your
vehicle. Rinse the wheels thoroughly.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, care must be
taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Only Mopart Wheel Cleaners are recommended. Any of
the “DO NOT USE” items listed below can damage
wheels and wheel trim.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• Aluminum wheels should be cleaned regularly with
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads or metal polishes. Avoid
automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially Aluminum, should
be cleaned regularly, using mild soap and water to

DO NOT USE:
• Any abrasive cleaner
• Any abrasive cleaning pad (such as steel wool) or
abrasive brush
• Any cleaner that contains an acid which can react with
and discolor the chrome surface.
• Oven cleaner
• A car wash that uses carbide-tipped wheel cleaning
brushes or acidic solutions.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
Many wheel cleaners contain acids that may harm the
wheel surface.
Interior Care
Use Mopart Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Use Mopart Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopart Vinyl Cleaner is specifically recommended for
vinyl trim.
Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopart Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or

249

ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.

CAUTION!
The use of vinyl, leather or plastic protectants may
cause excessive gloss and/or discoloration of interior
trim parts.

WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

250

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in the vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

• Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.

Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive-type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.

• Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE

251

Washing

CAUTION!

Due not use sharp-edged instruments to remove
snow or ice from the soft top.

• Remove bird droppings immediately. The organic
acid can damage the material and cause the top to
leak.

NOTE: Place a suitable cover over the top if you are
going to park the vehicle outside for a extended period of
time.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and cargo compartment divider.

• Never use a power washer to clean the top, as you
may damage the top material.
• If an automatic car wash is used, never use
hot-wax.
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.

252

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

General Cleaning

CAUTION!
Do not use any of the following to clean the top:
• Gasoline
• Paint Thinner
• Tar and Stain Removers
• Glass Cleaner
• Similar Organic Solvents
• Abrasive Type Cleaners or Bleaches
The following methods are sufficient if the top is only
lightly soiled:
Dry Cleaning
Brush the dry top with a soft-bristled brush from front to
rear of the vehicle.

Wet Cleaning
Wash with clear water or with a mild detergent and an
ample supply of luke warm water by wiping with a
soft-bristled brush or sponge from front to rear. Then
rinse thoroughly with clear water.
Allow the top to dry before lowering. Vacuuming the top
with a wet/dry shop vacuum will decrease the top’s
drying time, ensure removal of all dirt, and delete streaks
in the material. Multiple cleanings may be necessary to
remove stubborn stains. If stains persist, contact your
local dealership for further suggestions.
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodically with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant (part number
4773427), to keep them soft and pliable.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

253

FUSES
Underhood Accessory Fuse Block Fuses
The underhood accessory fuse block fuses are located
under the hood on the driver’s side, between the brake
master cylinder and the left front fender.
To remove the lid, squeeze the tabs together located at the
front of the fusebox. Then lift the lid up by the tabs. The
lid will then slide off the top of the fuse box. To replace
the lid, place the two hinge-like tabs at the rear of the lid
under the tabs on the fusebox. Push down on the front of
the lid until the tabs at the front click.

254

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Underhood Accessory Fuse Block Fuses
Cavity
1

2
3

4
5
5
6
6
7

Fuse
5 Amp
Beige
5 Amp
Beige
5 Amp
Beige
7.5 Amp
Brown
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
White
5 Amp
Beige
40 Amp
Orange
5 Amp
Beige

Circuits
Garage Door Opening Signal,
Tire Pressure Control and Seat
Heater
Control Unit Airbag
Indicator, Safety Restraint System
and Indicator Passenger Airbag
Off
Heated Mirror
Radio (Coupe)

Cavity
8
9
10
11
12
13

Roof Control Module (Roadster)

Exterior Mirror Adjustment, Left
And Right (Coupe)
Roof Hydraulic Unit (Roadster)

Occupation Classification Module
(Right Seat)

16
17

Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
5 Amp
Beige
5 Amp
Beige
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Beige
10 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Orange

255

Circuits
Radio
Control Unit Airbag
Speed Control
Ignition Coil 6 Cyl.
Washer Liquid Heater, Washer
Nozzle Heater
Roof Light, Horn, Anti-TheftAlarm, Trunk Light and Tire
Pressure Control
Diagnostic Socket
Climate Control, Auxiliary Water
Pump
Spoiler Motor
Electronic Stability Program

256

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
30
30

Fuse
40 Amp
Orange
40 Amp
Orange
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue

Circuits
Electronic Stability Program

Cavity
31

Power Window, Front

Wiper Motor

Seat Adjustment Right Side

34
34

Seat Adjustment Left Side
35
Sound Booster (Amplifier)
Seat Heater

Pneumatic Control Unit, Rear
Window Defroster
Central Locking

Spare (Coupe)
Radio (Roadster)

Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
5 Amp
Beige
30 Amp
Green
15 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Green
5 Amp
Beige
7.5 Amp
Brown

Circuits
Cigar Lighter, Glove Compartment Light
Wiper, Washer Pump, Headlight
Flasher
Control Unit
Spare (Coupe)
Climate Control (Roadster)
Radio Frequency Remote Control,
Hazard Warning Flasher, Instrument Cluster, Climate Control
Climate Control (Coupe)
Exterior Mirror Adjustment
(Roadster)
Circulating Air, Instrument Cluster, Radio Frequency Remote
Control, Climate Control, Central
Control Unit

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

257

Relay Control Module Fuses

The relay control module fuses are located in the Control
Module Box next to the battery in the engine compartment. Slide the control module box cover retaining clips
forward and lift the cover from the control module box to
gain access to the relay control module fuses.

Relay Control Module Fuses
Cavity
1
2
3
4

Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Orange

Circuits
Traction System
Engine Control 2
Engine Control 1
Air Pump

258

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
5
6

Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue

Circuits
Fuel Pump
Horn

Interior Fuses

Interior Fuses
Cavity
1
2
3
The fuse access door is located on the end of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side behind the trim
panel cover. Use a coin or flat blade screwdriver to open
and close this access door.

4
5

Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
7.5 Amp
Brown
15 Amp
Blue
7.5 Amp
Brown

Circuits
Not Assigned
Brake Lamp/Speed Control
Right High Beam, High Beam
Indicator Light
Reverse/Turn signal Light
Left High Beam

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
7.5 Amp
Brown
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
7.5 Amp
Brown
7.5 Amp
Brown

Circuits
Right Low Beam
Right Parking/Tail Light Side
Marker
Left Low Beam
Fog Light
Left Parking/Tail Light Side
Marker
License Plate/Instrument Cluster
Lighting/Symbol Lighting
Not Used - Spare Fuse
Not Used - Spare Fuse
Not Used - Spare Fuse

259

REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Light Bulbs
For lighted switches and interior lights, see your authorized dealer for servicing requirements.
Exterior Light Bulbs
Bulb
Bulb No.
Headlight - High and Low Beam . . . . . . 12V55W H7U
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y21W
Front Parking/Standing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Front Side Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . LED
Front Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HB455W
Rear Turn Signal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y21W
Rear Tail and Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21/5W
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21W
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

260

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EXTERIOR LIGHT BULB SERVICE
Headlights

3. Release the spring clamps holding the bulb in place,
and pull out the bulb. Replace the bulb and reverse the
removal procedure exactly.

WARNING!
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can
explode if you:
• Touch or move it when hot
• Drop the bulb
• Scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
NOTE: To prevent a possible electrical short circuit,
switch off light prior to replacing a bulb.
1. Push the tab down at the top end of the cover and
remove.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

261

Front Turn Signal and Parking/Standing Lights
• Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.
Push the bulb into the socket, turn counterclockwise
and remove.
• Replace the bulb, push in and twist clockwise. Reinstall the socket, and turn clockwise.
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lights
1. Push the front sidemarker assembly in and slide it
forward. Push the rear sidemarker assembly in and slide
rearward. The assembly will release from the fascia.
2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.
Push the bulb into the socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.

Tail, Stop, Back Up and Turn Signal Lights
1. Open the rear liftgate / decklid and remove the access
door in the trim panel.

3. Replace the light, push in and twist clockwise.

2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out.

4. Realign the two tabs and push the light in until it
engages into the lock.

3. Replace the light and return to open socket, turn
clockwise until it stops.

262

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Replace the access door in the trim panel.

NOTE: Always test the operation of all lights after
service operations have been performed to validate an
effective repair.

License Plate Light
1. Remove the two lens assembly mounting screws.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Replace the bulb and reattach the lens assembly.
4. Align and resecure the two lens assembly mounting
screws.
NOTE: Be sure not to over-torque the mounting screws
or permanent damage to the lens may occur.

Headlight Aiming
The headlights on your new vehicle were aimed at the
factory. The factory setting was made at a no load setting.
A great increase in weight will change the aiming and it
may be necessary to readjust the headlights if carrying an
excessive amount of weight in the rear cargo area. To
readjust the headlights first mark the position of the
headlights on a wall prior to loading the vehicle. Load

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

263

the vehicle and then readjust the headlights to the
original position. If any further adjustments are necessary contact your manufacturer’s dealer. A detailed service procedure is contained in the manufacturer’s Service
Manual. Information on purchasing a Service Manual can
be found at the back of this Owner’s Manual.

• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing temperatures, remove the battery and store it in a dry, wellventilated place. If the vehicle is not going to be driven
in the next three weeks, follow the battery recharge
procedure in the Service Manual, then disconnect the
battery at the negative terminal.

VEHICLE STORAGE
We recommend that you follow these guidelines before
storing your Crossfire for extended periods.

CAUTION!

• Fill the gas tank. This will prevent water condensation
inside the tank. If you plan on storing your vehicle
more than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel
stabilizer to the gas tank.
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustionrelated acids in the crankcase.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent accidental damage to the finish.
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.

Use care when disconnecting the remote positive
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
Disconnecting the battery causes the engine control system to lose memory of some “learned” functions. The
engine may run rough when first started after a battery
disconnect until the control module “relearns” these
functions.
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that
the voltage is above 12.40. Voltage will drop more rapidly

264

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

in hot temperatures. If battery voltage drops below 12.40,
follow the battery recharge procedure in the Service
Manual.
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to
at least -20°F (-29°C).

• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the following:

• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.

1. Make sure that the rear liftgate/decklid, hood, and
doors are completely closed.

• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.

2. Make sure that the remote transmitter is operating and
that the battery is good.

• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
prevent tire flat spotting.

3. Make sure that the hood, rear liftgate and door
switches are in adjustment.

• For long term storage, remove the tires and put the
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.

4. Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Performance Specifications (approximate)

SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Specifications
Engine Size
Mode of Operation
No. of Cylinders
Horsepower (SAE J 1349)
Bore
Stroke
Torque (SAE J 1349)
Firing Order
Compression Ratio
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug Gap
Tightening Torque
Maximum Engine Speed
Accessory Drive Belt

265

195.2 CID (3.2 Liters)
4–stroke engine, gasoline
injection
6
215 hp (160 kW) @ 5700
rpm
3.54 in. (89.90 mm)
3.30 in. (84.00 mm)
229 ft. lbs. (310 N·m) @
3000 rpm
1–4–3–6–2–5
10:1
Bosch F 8 DPER/ NGK
PFR 5–11
0.039 in. (1.0 mm)
15-22 ft. lbs. (20-30 N·m)
6000 rpm
94.1 in. (2390 mm)

Maximum Speed
Acceleration 0–60 mph
1/4 mile time

150 mph (242 km/h)
6.5 seconds
14.9 seconds at 96 mph
(154 km/h)

Gear Ratios - 6-Speed Manual Transmission
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Sixth
Reverse

4.459
2.614
1.723
1.245
1.000
0.838
4.062

Gear Ratios - 5-Speed Automatic Transmission
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Reverse

3.95
2.423
1.486
1.00
0.833
3.147/1.93

266

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Specifications
Overall Length
Maximum Width
Maximum Width With
Mirrors
Overall Height
Coupe:
Roadster:
Front Track
Rear Track
Wheelbase
Front Overhang
Rear Overhang

159.8 in. (4058 mm)
69.5 in. (1766 mm)
76.9 in. (1954 mm)

51.5
51.8
58.8
59.1
94.5
32.4
32.9

in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.

(1307 mm)
(1315 mm)
(1493 mm)
(1502 mm)
(2400 mm)
(822 mm)
(836 mm)

Front Ground Clearance
Rear Ground Clearance
Turning Radius
Weight
Coupe:
Roadster:
Maximum Vehicle Load
Luggage Capacity
Coupe:
Roadster:

5.0 in. (127 mm)
5.8 in. (147 mm)
32.2 ft. (9.8 m)
3010 lbs. (1365 kg)
3097 lbs. (1405 kg)
415 lbs.. (188 kg)
7.7 cu. ft. (215 l)
6.5 cu. ft. (190 l) - Top Up
3.6 cu. ft. (104 l) - Top
Down

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

267

FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
15.8 Gallons
2 Gallons

Metric
60.0 Liters
7.5 Liters

3.2 L Engine

8.5 Qts.

8.0 Liters

3.2 L Engine

11.8 Qts.
1.9 Qts.
8.5 Qts.
1.4 Qts.
1.1 Qts.
.5 Qts.
7.4 Qts.

11.2 Liters
1.8 Liters
8.0 Liters
1.3 Liters
1.0 Liters
.5 Liters
7.0 Liters

Fuel (Approximate)
Fuel Tank Reserve
Engine Oil (with filter)
Cooling System *
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Rear Axle
Power Steering Reservoir
Brake Reservoir
Windshield Washer Reservoir (MAX fill when empty)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

268

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Spark Plug Gap
Fuel Selection

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Use coolant approved to MB 325.0, such as Valvoline GO5, or an equivalent
extended life coolant.
Only use synthetic engine oils, approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5, such as
Mobil 1 SAE 0W-40. The FSS may not alert for an oil change at the proper
interval if an unapproved engine oil is used; engine damage and reduced
engine life may result.
Mopart 5102905AA or equivalent
Bosch F 8 DPER/NGK PFR 5-11
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

269

Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder

Clutch Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid
Power Steering Reservoir

Rear Axle Fluid
Tire Pressure

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Only use ATF approved to MB 236.10, MB 236.12. Synthetic Dexron IIIt
Transmission Fluid may be substituted.
Use brake fluid approved to MB 331.0, or a DOT 4 brake fluid with: minimum dry boiling point (ERBP) 500°F (260°C), minimum wet boiling point
(WERBP) 356°F (180°C), maximum viscosity 1500 mm2/s, conforming to
FMVSS 116 and ISO 4925.
Use brake fluid approved to MB 331.0, or a DOT 4 brake fluid with: minimum dry boiling point (ERBP) 500°F (260°C), minimum wet boiling point
(WERBP) 356°F (180°C), maximum viscosity 1500 mm2/s, conforming to
FMVSS 116 and ISO 4925.
No fluid service required. Only use fluid approved to MB 236.2. SAE
5W-20 engine oil, meeting API SL or GF-3, may be substituted.
No fluid service required. Filled at the factory with Pentosin CHF 11S.
Steering noise and reduced component life may result if an unapproved
fluid is used.
Only use synthetic SAE 75W-85 axle lubricant that meets MB 231.1. Reduced axle durability may result if an unapproved product is used.
Refer to label on driver’s door frame.

270

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body
Component
Hinges:

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Door Mopart Spray White Lube
Liftgate / Decklid Mopart Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Hood Springs and Links Mopart Spray White Lube
Latches:
Liftgate/Decklid
Hood/Safety Catch
Door
Seat Regulator and Track
Window System Components
Lock Cylinders
Spoiler

Mopart
Mopart
Mopart
Mopart
Mopart
Mopart
Mopart

Spray White Lube
Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Spray White Lube
Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB
Spray White Lube
Lock Cylinder Lube
Spray White Lube

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

m Regular Check-Ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S

m Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

▫ Additional Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 279 C

m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 273

m Special Maintenance Requirements . . . . . . . . . 280 E

m Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

▫ Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 U

▫ Scope Of Work For “A” Schedule
Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

▫ Dust Filter For Heating/Ventilation
E
Replacement (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 S

▫ Scope Of Work For “B” Schedule
Maintenance Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
m FSS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

H
D
L

m Engine Oil Change And Filter Replacement . . . 280

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

272

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

INTRODUCTION
This is intended as a guide to the service requirements of
your vehicle.
It contains all necessary instructions concerning service
intervals and operations which have to be carried out.
Scope and frequency of maintenance work primarily
depend on the vehicle’s operating conditions. In the
interest of maintaining the vehicle’s operating safety, the
specified work should be performed regularly and in
good time.
Our vehicles are subject to ongoing development. Technical progress may also affect the scope of service work
performed.
“Daily vehicle checks” before starting a journey are the
responsibility of the driver.

WARRANTY
The DaimlerChrysler Corporation Dealer network is at
your disposal for maintenance work. Each of these workshops has the equipment and tools, the specially trained,
skilled and experienced personnel and receives regular
technical instruction from DaimlerChrysler Corporation
to ensure that your vehicle is inspected and maintained
thoroughly and in accordance with the latest procedures.
Please follow the instructions given in this Owner’s
Manual and ensure that they are observed, even if you
hand the vehicle over to a third party for use or care. By
not observing these instructions you may void your
warranty rights.
If the specified oil and maintenance services are not
carried out regularly or at the time intervals specified, a
decision as to the validity of a warranty claim can only be
made after DaimlerChrysler Corporation has investigated your claim.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

The use of Special lubricant additives is not recommended. The use of such additives may affect your
warranty rights. With regard to legal stipulations concerning emissions control, please note that engines have
to be serviced and adjusted in accordance with special
instructions and using special measuring equipment.
Modifications to or interference with the emissions control systems are not permissible.
All DaimlerChrysler Corporation dealers are familiar
with the relevant and applicable regulations.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for your Crossfire in severe
operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short
trip driving.

273 M

Inspection and service also should be done any time a I
N
malfunction is suspected.
T
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

E
N
A
N
C
E

S
C
H
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
E
D
There are two maintenance schedules that show the U
L
required service for your vehicle.
E
Schedule “A” typically rotates with Schedule “B.” Follow S

Schedule “A” after the first service interval, Schedule “B”
after the second service interval, and so on. In some cases
where the service interval has been extended due to very
light duty driving, a Schedule “B” service may be indicated following a previous Schedule “B” service. There
are additional service tasks required under Schedule “B.”

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

274

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Your Flexible Service System (FSS) — see Understanding
Your Instrument Panel section — should give you an
exact indication of when your vehicle should be scheduled for service and which schedule to follow.
Additional Periodic Maintenance items should also be
performed beyond the items listed in the following charts
to assure the optimum performance of your Crossfire.
SCOPE OF WORK FOR “A” SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Oil Change
• Change oil and replace filter
Maintenance
• Lubricate hood hinges, latch, and secondary latch
• Reset FSS Display
Function Check
• Horn, hazard warning flashers, turn signals, and indicator lamps

• Headlamps and exterior lighting
• Windshield wipers and washer system
Inspection
• Check front and rear brake pads for lining thickness
• Check tires for damage and general condition
• Check tire inflation pressures and correct if necessary
Fluid Levels
Check fluid levels for the following systems and correct if
necessary. Should there be a loss of fluid that cannot be
explained by regular use, trace and eliminate the cause.
• Engine cooling system (check corrosion inhibitor/
antifreeze)
• Hydraulic brake system
• Power steering system
• Windshield washer system

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

SCOPE OF WORK FOR “B” SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Oil Change
• Change oil and replace filter
Maintenance
• Rotate tires
• Replace dust filter (if equipped)
• Lubricate hood hinges, latch, and secondary latch
• Reset FSS Display
Function Check
• Horn, hazard warning flashers, turn signals, and indicator lamps

275 M

A
I
N
front and rear brake pads for lining thickness T
E
N
condition of front and rear brake discs
A
N
tires for damage and general condition
C
tire inflation pressures and correct if necessary E

Inspection
• Check
• Check
• Check
• Check

S
C
H
E
D
• Check condition of front axle ball joints and rubber U
L
boots
E
• Check condition of steering components and rubber S

• Check major underbody components for leakage or
damage (if there are signs of leakage, determine cause
and repair)

boots

• Windshield wipers and washer system

• Check underhood components for leakage or damage
(if there are signs of leakage determine cause and
repair)

• Check seat belts for damage and proper function

• Check condition of accessory drive belt

• Test hydraulic brakes and check parking brake function

• Check headlamp aiming, adjust if necessary

• Headlamps and exterior lighting

• Check windshield wiper blades, replace if necessary

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E

276

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

• Hydraulic brake system

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Fluid Levels
Check fluid levels for the following systems and correct if
necessary. Should there be a loss of fluid that cannot be
explained by regular use, trace and eliminate the cause.
• Engine cooling system (check corrosion inhibitor/
antifreeze)
• Power steering system
• Windshield washer system
FSS SYSTEM
The Flexible Service System (FSS) permits a flexible
service schedule that is directly related to the operating
conditions of the vehicle. See the Understanding Your
Instrument Panel section for details on how to use the
FSS.
The oil change interval for your Crossfire is initially set at
7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000 km). Very light duty driving
cycles (most trips more than 10 miles [16 km] at moderate
speeds in moderate temperature conditions) can extend

the service interval beyond 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000
km). If ANY of the following apply to your driving, the
oil change interval can be reduced significantly:
− Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
− Stop and go driving.
− Extensive engine idling.
− Driving in dusty conditions.
− Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
− More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
There are two symbols which will appear in the main
odometer display field prior to the next suggested service.
This symbol represents Service A.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

This second symbol represents Service B. Service B rotates with Service A and includes
additional service tasks.
The next service is normally calculated and
displayed next to the Service A or Service B
symbol as distance remaining before the next
service is required.
Depending on operating conditions throughout the year, a clock symbol may appear next to
the service symbol. When this occurs, the next
service is calculated and displayed in days
remaining before the next service is required.
You should have the maintenance performed within the
stated time period or distance.
Following a completed A or B service your authorized
dealer sets the counter to 7,000 miles (Canada: 11,000
km).

277 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
The interval between services is determined by the type N
C
of vehicle operation. Driving at extreme speeds, and cold E

NOTE: When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or
more days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any
such days not counted by FSS can be added by your
authorized dealer.

starts combined with short distance driving in which the
engine does not reach normal operating temperature, S
C
reduce the interval between services.
H
E

Regardless of the service interval determined by your D
FSS, the scheduled services as posted in this manual must U
L
be followed to properly care for your vehicle.
E
S

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

278

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

REGULAR CHECK-UPS
To maintain the safe operation of your vehicle, it is
recommended that you perform the following tasks on a
regular basis (i.e., weekly or whenever the vehicle is
refueled).

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
• Inspect wiper blade condition.
• Check operation of lighting systems.

CAUTION!

• Inspect tires for unusual wear, damage, and pressure
(at least every 14 days).

Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.

• Mechanical assemblies (e.g., engine, transmission, etc.)
- check for leaks.
Once a Month

At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. See the procedure described in Checking Your Engine Oil in the Understanding Your Instrument Panel section or under
Engine Oil in the Maintaining Your Vehicle section.
Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or
MIN mark.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and power steering and add as
needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

279 M

Every 2 years:

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
At approximately every 100,000 miles (161,000 km) or 5 N
C
years:
E

• Inspect body for paint damage.

• Replace spark plugs.

Additional Periodic Maintenance
The following maintenance items should be performed
during the scheduled maintenance nearest the time
elapsed and/or distance shown. Follow the interval that
occurs first.

• Check chassis and supporting body parts for damage
and corrosion.
At approximately every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 4
years:
• Check condition of driveshaft flex discs.
• Retighten locking bolts for steering (observe torque).
At approximately every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 4
years:
• Replace fuel filter.
• Replace air cleaner filter element.
At approximately 80,000 miles (129,000 km):

• Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Use the recommended automatic transmission fluid.
After this change it is filled for life. The manual
transmission comes filled for life from the factory.

S
C
Every 100,000 miles (161,000 km) or 5 years:
H
E
• Replace engine coolant using coolant approved to MB D
325.0, such as Valvoline GO5, or an equivalent ex- U
L
tended life coolant.
E
S

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
maintenance service, take your vehicle to a competent technician.

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

280

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

SPECIAL MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Coolant
Have the corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentration in
the coolant checked before the onset of winter (once a
year in countries with high prevailing temperatures).
Have the coolant replaced every five years or 100,000
miles (160,000 km).
Dust Filter for Heating/Ventilation Replacement (If
Equipped)
The dust filter is replaced during routine maintenance
service. The filter element must be replaced with “B”
Schedule service or every 18,500 miles (30,000 km) to
maintain effectiveness. However, if operating conditions
are dusty, these filters should be replaced more frequently. A cover in the HVAC unit that can be reached
from the passenger foot well provides access to the filter
element.

ENGINE OIL CHANGE AND FILTER
REPLACEMENT
The recommended oil and filter change interval is based
on FSS or 1 year. Please refer to the heading FSS System
in this section for a full description of the use and
interpretation of symbols in the FSS system. Only use
synthetic engine oils, approved to MB 229.3 or MB 229.5,
such as Mobil 1 SAE 0W-40. The FSS may not alert for an
oil change at the proper interval if an unapproved engine
oil is used; engine damage and reduced engine life may
result. Information is available from your authorized
dealer. The oil filter should always be changed when the
oil is changed.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

m Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

282

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty; discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a valuable clue to
the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a

minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
DaimlerChrysler and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Your selling dealer is best equipped and most anxious to
provide prompt resolution for any warranty issue or
related matter that you may experience. Authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to assure your
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
DaimlerChrysler has empowered its dealers to make
warranty and repair decisions that ensure you are not
inconvenienced. There is no need for you to wait for a
decision from the DaimlerChrysler Corporation. If a
special circumstance occurs that requires information
from the DaimlerChrysler Corporation, we have asked
the dealer’s service management to make the contact on
your behalf.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the DaimlerChrysler Corporation’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the DaimlerChrysler Corporation’s Customer Center should include the following
information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

283

DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001
In Mexico contact:
A.V. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico (915) 729-1248 or 729-1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729-1248 or 729-1240

284

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
DaimlerChrysler Corporation has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer Center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States
can communicate with the DaimlerChrysler Corporation by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after your DaimlerChrysler Corporation’s new vehicle limited warranty expires. The
DaimlerChrysler Corporation stands behind only the
DaimlerChrysler Corporation’s Service Contracts. If
you purchased a DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service
Contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of your vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about your service contract, call the

DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The DaimlerChrysler Corporation will not stand behind
any service contract that is not the DaimlerChrysler
Corporation’s Service Contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the DaimlerChrysler
Corporation’s Service Contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a DaimlerChrysler Corporation
Service Contract, and you require service after your
DaimlerChrysler Corporation’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to your contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new Crossfire. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your authorized dealer. They will help
you keep your vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 states of the United States and Washington,
D.C.: If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
DaimlerChrysler Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
DaimlerChrysler Corporation.

285

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, P.O. Box 8880, Ottawa Postal Station,
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 3J2.

286

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.

• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

287

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories established by the National highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.

Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.

WARNING!

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.

288

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

INDEX

290

INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 239
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Aiming Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,232
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,123
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,48
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Ashtrays and Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,244
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,231
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,242
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . 55,166
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Capacities, Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

INDEX

Capacity, Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Cargo Compartment
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,130
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cleaning
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

291

Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Convertible Top Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Convertible Top Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,280
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240,241
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Rubber and Plastic Components . . . . . . . . . . 241
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 239
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Crankcase Emission Control System . . . . . . . . . 231
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Cylinders, Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Deck Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

292

INDEX

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . 102
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . 223,273
Engine
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,267

Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,267
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fluid Level Checks
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 268
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

INDEX

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . 105
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Gear Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Headlights
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Hood Latch Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

293

Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . 231
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

294

INDEX

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Lights
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,123
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,259
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 124
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,261
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124,223
Manual Override, Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . 211
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,245
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

INDEX

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . 93,181
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,285
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,223
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 286
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

295

Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . 75
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,233
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Program Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108,109
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rear Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Residual Engine Heat Utilization (REST) . . . 139,140

296

INDEX

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Standing Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Steering
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Sulfur in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . 30
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . .
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . 92
. . . . . . . . . 195
. . . . . . . . . . 19
. . . . . . . . . . 19

INDEX

TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,175,287
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195,200
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,176
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 93,181
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,287
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,175
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tow-Away Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,210
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

297

Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,244
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,245
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Umbrella Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . 167,287
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106,109
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 19

298

INDEX

Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Windows
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Wiring, Ignition (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . 231

INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS KeysObtaining Replacement KeysIgnition
Key RemovalKey-In-Ignition ReminderGLOVE COMPARTMENT LOCK DOOR LOCKS Central Locking SwitchAutomatic Central LockingGeneral Notes On the Central Locking SystemEmergency Unlocking FeatureStart LockoutREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To Unlock the
DoorsTo Lock The DoorsPanic AlarmTo Use the Panic AlarmGeneral InformationTransmitter Battery ServiceSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM Tow-Away AlarmDECKLID INTERNAL EMERGENCY RELEASE - ROADSTER POWER WINDOWS Power Window Operation With
The Convertible Top Switch (Roadster Only)REAR LIFTGATE/DECKLID RELEASE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsSeat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag Child RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Exhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside the VehiclePeriodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION To Lower
The TopTo Raise The TopConvertible Top Lamp and Audible Signal ChartCONSOLE FEATURES Storage Compartments (If Equipped)AshtrayCoin HolderPower Outlet/Cigar LighterGlove CompartmentCUPHOLDER (If Equipped) MIRRORS Inside Day/Night MirrorExterior
Mirrors Folding FeatureHeated Remote Control Mirrors (If Equipped)Outside MirrorsPower Remote Control Outside MirrorsVanity Mirrors SEATS Manual Seat Adjustments (If Equipped)Driver Eight-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)Passenger Four-Way Power Seat (If Equipped)
Heated Seats (If Equipped)TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD INTERIOR LIGHTS Front Map/Reading LightsBattery Saver FeatureInstrument Panel LightingNight Security IlluminationEXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlights and Parking LightsDaytime Running Lights (Where
Applicable)Fog Lights (If Equipped)Standing LightsMULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER Turn SignalsHeadlight Dimmer SwitchPassing LightWindshield Wipers And WasherMist FunctionTELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (if
equipped) REAR SPOILER BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP) Synchronizing ESPELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL To Vary The Speed SettingTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedUsing Speed Control On HillsGARAGE DOOR
OPENER (If Equipped) Programming The Universal TransceiverGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing the Universal TransceiverErasing Universal Transceiver ButtonsReprogramming a Single ButtonSecurityUMBRELLA HOOK UNDERSTANDING YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION INFINITY MODULUS AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH SINGLE-DISC CD PLAYER AND GPS NAVIGATION AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
SINGLE-DISC CD PLAYER INFINITY MODULUS Entertainment SystemsCD Player OperationUser MenuUser Memory (USER - 1, 2, 3)Mono/StereoDriver - L/RTelephone mute characteristicsCOMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE RADIO ANTENNA RADIO OPERATION AND
CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Temperature ControlFan ControlBasic Setting - HeaterBasic Setting - Air ConditionerDust Filter (If Equipped)Operating Tips STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Normal StartingExtremely Cold Weather
(below -20 degrees F or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails to StartAfter StartingTRANSMISSION SHIFTING Manual Transmission Recommended Shift SpeedsAutomatic Transmission StoppingManeuveringPark PositionReverseNeutralDriveAutoStick Gear selectionGear Ranges
Program mode selector switchEmergency Operation (Limp Home Mode)PARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Brake Assist System (BAS)Electronic Stability Program (ESP)Synchronizing ESPESP Control switchAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Brake Pad Break-InPOWER
STEERING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES-GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply TiresTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsReplacement TiresAlignment
And BalanceTIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (If Equipped) General InformationTIRE CHAINS ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRES SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsMMT
in GasolineMaterials Added to FuelSulfur in GasolineADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)VEHICLE LOADING Roof Luggage RackTRAILER TOWING WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS TIREFIT TIRE
REPAIR AND JACKING TIREFITPreparations for JackingJack Location and Instructions JUMP-STARTING THE BATTERY DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing EyesTow-Away Alarm
CONVERTIBLE TOP EMERGENCY OPERATION Relieving Hydraulic PressureOpening a Locked DecklidMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3.2L ENGINE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilIgnition Wiring SystemCrankcase Emission Control SystemMaintenance-Free BatteryAir ConditionerPower Steering FluidChassis LubricationBody LubricationWindshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield Washer ReservoirExhaust SystemCooling SystemHoses And Vacuum/Vapor HarnessesBrakesAutomatic TransmissionManual TransmissionAppearance Care and Protection from CorrosionCONVERTIBLE TOP CARE
WashingGeneral CleaningWeather Strip CareFUSES Underhood Accessory Fuse Block FusesRelay Control Module Fuses Interior Fuses REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Light BulbsExterior Light BulbsEXTERIOR LIGHT BULB SERVICE HeadlightsFront Turn Signal and
Parking/Standing LightsFront and Rear Sidemarker LightsTail, Stop, Back Up and Turn Signal LightsLicense Plate LightHeadlight AimingVEHICLE STORAGE SPECIFICATIONS FLUID CAPACITIES RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine
ChassisBodyMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INTRODUCTION WARRANTY EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES SCOPE OF WORK FOR A SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SERVICESCOPE OF WORK FOR B SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SERVICEFSS SYSTEM REGULAR CHECK-UPS Additional Periodic MaintenanceSPECIAL MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS CoolantDust Filter for Heating/Ventilation Replacement (If Equipped)ENGINE OIL CHANGE AND FILTER REPLACEMENT IF
YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION MOPAR PARTS REPORTING
SAFETY DEFECTS In CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Modify Date                     : 2006:11:09 15:36:18-05:00
Create Date                     : 2006:11:09 13:35:02Z
Subject                         : 
Page Count                      : 299
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
About                           : uuid:5b2e7717-5ae1-4bbe-abd1-c8174108c7db
Keywords                        : 
Producer                        : 
Mod Date                        : 2006:11:09 15:36:18-05:00
Creation Date                   : 2006:11:09 13:35:02Z
Author                          : 
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Metadata Date                   : 2006:11:09 15:36:18-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:d95f608a-d18d-4b74-8c06-365cc3e01e13
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Creator                         : 
Description                     : 
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Chrysler 2007 Crossfire Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation